Sie sind auf Seite 1von 533

IP-432/IP-424 PS-344/PS-346

Thank you very much for purchasing the KONICA MINOLTA Print Controller. This Users Manual includes instructions for making prints, correct handling of the machine, and precautions for safety. Please read this manual before printing. In order to maintain a satisfactory printing performance, please keep this Users Manual readily available for reference.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT:
Microsoft, MS and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States. IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines, Inc. in the United States. WindowsTM is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. HP and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. Agfa Microtype font is a registered trademark of Agfa Corporation. PEERLESS is a registered trademark of PEERLESS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. Apple, Macintosh and Mac are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Adobe, Adobe Logo, Acrobat, Acrobat Logo, PostScript and PostScript Logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc. Other company names and product names used in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.

COPYRIGHT
2004 by Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Introduction

Introduction
The KONICA MINOLTA print controller is designed to be a built-in server for the KONICA MINOLTA printer/ copier. It enables direct printing from Windows-compliant computers. It can also enable use of the copier as a network printer when an internal network interface card is used.

FCC Regulation (for U.S.A only)


Warning:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential area. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit other than the circuit to which the receiver is connected. Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Canadian Department of Communications Regulations


Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Patent Notice
The product includes an implementation of LZW licensed under U.S.Patent 4,558,302.

Built-in Fonts
The print controller includes support for PCL5e Language (HP PCL clone) and includes the 80 built-in Agfa Microtype fonts. For details on fonts, refer to [font list] ( Page 491).

Note
A part or all of this User's Guide may not be used or copied without permission. KONICA MINOLTA will have no liability for any incidents caused by using the printing system and this manual. Information written in this User's Guide is subject to change without notice. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. maintains the copyright of this printer driver.

iii

Introduction

Introduction

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT


This package contains the following materials provided by Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system, the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the special format and in the encrypted form ("Font Programs"), other software which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software ("Host Software"), and related explanatory written materials ("Documentation"). The term "Software" shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions, additions, and copies of the Software. The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement. KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree to the following: 1. 2. You may use the Printing Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 ("Printing Software") above, you may use Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols ("Typefaces") on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not installed or used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install the Software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee's right and interest to such Software and Documentation ("Assignee") provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of such Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain with KMBT. Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of the trademark owner's name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software that the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and Documentation as described above

3.

4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

10. In no event will KMBT be liable to you for any consequential, incidental or special damages, including any lost profits or lost saving, even if KMBT has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for any claim by any third party. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental, consequential or special damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you. 11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101, consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein.

Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

iv

Introduction

Introduction

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (Exclusive for PostScript3 Option)


This package contains the following materials provided by Adobe Systems Incorporated (Adobe) and Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system, including PostScript software and other Adobe software (Printing Software), the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the special format and in the encrypted form (Font Programs), other software which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software (Host Software), and related explanatory written materials (Documentation). The term Software shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions, additions, and copies of the Software. The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement. KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree to the following: 1. 2. You may use the Printing Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 (Printing Software) above, you may use Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not installed or used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install the Adobe Driver Software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensees right and interest to such Software and Documentation (Assignee) provided you transfers to Assignee all copies of such Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation. You agree that it will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain with Adobe and KMBT. Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of the trademark owners name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and Documentation as described above.

3.

4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

10. In no event will KMBT or Adobe be liable to you for any consequential, incidental or special damages, including any lost profits or lost saving, even if KMBT has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for any claim by any third party. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental, consequential or special damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you. 11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a commercial item, as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101, consisting of commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation, as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein. 12. You are hereby notified that Adobe Systems Incorporated, a Delaware corporation located at 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, CA 95110-2704 (Adobe), is a third-party beneficiary to this Agreement to the extent that this Agreement contains provisions which relate to Licensees use of the Software, Font Programs, Typefaces and the trademarks licensed hereby. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Adobe and are enforceable by Adobe in addition to KMBT.

Introduction

Introduction

CONTENTS
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv Folder structure on the CD-ROM (Print controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Folder structure on the CD-ROM (PostScript3 option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix Screens used with this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix Usage of this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xx

I Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-1. What is the Print Controller?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Role of the Print Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 What You Can Do with the Print Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Four Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1-2.

Flow of Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Flow for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 PC-Fax Transmission Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1-3.

Operation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operating Systems and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Interfaces Used for Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

II Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
The Flow for Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
New Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Updating a Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14


2-1. 2-2. 2-3. Checking the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Using the Print Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Printer Driver Types and Supported Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Page Notation Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18


PCL Driver Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Adobe PostScript Driver Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Checking Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

2-4.

Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34


Access Rights and Range of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCL Driver Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adobe PostScript Driver Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 35 39 46

vi

Introduction

Introduction

2-5.

Using this Printing System with Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48


Access Rights and Range of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCL Driver Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adobe PostScript Driver Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 49 53 62 65 66 71 80

2-6.

Using this Printing System with Windows XP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65


Access Rights and Range of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCL Driver Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adobe PostScript Driver Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-7. 2-8.

Using as a USB Printer (Windows 2000/XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83


Installing a Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Using this Printing System with a Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88


Adobe PostScript Driver Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Selecting the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Checking Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

2-9.

Updating the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100


Updating the Printer Driver with Windows 95/98/Me. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Printer Driver with Windows NT 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Printer Driver with Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Printer Driver with Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Printer Driver with Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 103 105 107 109

2-10. Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111


An Old Version of the Driver Is Already Installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 You Are Asked Which File to Use, the One You Are Installing or a New File Already on the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Test Page Cannot Be Printed.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Chapter 3 Printing from Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112


3-1. Setting Printer Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Windows 95/98/Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows NT 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 117 121 125 129

3-2. 3-3.

Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Basic Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132


Setting the Printer Languages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Number of Copies to Print (Copies). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Print Direction (Orientation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Print Paper Size (Paper Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Type of Paper (Media Type/Paper Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Enlarged/Reduced (Scaling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Input Tray (Paper Source) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Output Tray (Output Bin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Margin (Margins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 134 136 138 140 142 144 146 148 153 155 158 161 164 166

3-4.

Printing Multiple Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149


Printing on Both the Front and Rear of the Paper (Duplex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (Pages per Sheet/Layout) . . . . Folding Paper in Two to Make Booklets (Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fold&Stitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing One Copy at a Time of All Pages (Collate/Sort). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputting Sorted into Separate Sets of Copies (Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

vii

Introduction

Introduction
Stapling (Staple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Punch/Punch Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching a Front Cover/Back Cover (Front Cover/Back Cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching a Sheet Insertion (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 173 177 180 187 187 187 187 188 188 190 192 193 195

3-5.

Making Image Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187


Halftoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brightness (Windows 95/98/Me) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contrast (Windows 95/98/Me). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Density (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print as Black (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toner Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Resolution (Resolution). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing with Black and White Reversed (Print as a Negative Image). . . . . . . . . Printing with Left/Right Reversed (Print as a Mirror Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6. 3-7.

Setting the Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196


TrueType Font Settings (Windows 95/98/Me). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 PostScript Font Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Special Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203


Printing Overlaying Another Document (Overlay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Watermarks (Watermark). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing with a Password (Password Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Holding the Printed Text in the Document Folder(Hold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 207 211 216

3-8.

Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer . . . . . . . 220


Windows 95/98/Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Windows NT 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Windows 2000/XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232


4-1. 4-2. 4-3. Setting Printer Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Basic Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Setting the Number of Copies to Print (Copies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Print Direction (Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Print Paper Size (Paper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Any Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Type of Paper (Media Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Enlarged/Reduced (Magnification Ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Input Tray (Paper Source) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Print Order (Reverse Print Order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Output Tray (Output Bin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Margin (Margins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 238 240 242 244 246 248 250 251 253 258 260 264 267 269 271 275 278

4-4.

Printing Multiple Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255


Printing on Both the Front and Rear of the Paper (Duplex Printing) . . . . . . . . . . Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (Document Pages/Print Pages/Layout Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Paper in Two to Make Booklets (Special Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing One Copy at a Time of All Pages (Collate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputting Sorted into Separate Sets of Copies (Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stapling (Staple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Punch/Punch Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fold&Stitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

viii

Introduction

Introduction
Attaching a Front Cover/Back Cover (Front Cover/Back Cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

4-5.

Special Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284


Printing with Top/Bottom or Left/Right Reversed (Mirror Image Printing) . . . . . . Printing with Black and White Reversed (Negative Image Printing) . . . . . . . . . . Printing Watermarks (Watermark). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoothing Characters and Curved Lines (Smoothing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conserving Toner (Toner Save) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 285 286 289 291

4-6. 5-1. 5-2.

Making PostScript Settings (File Save) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Managing the Print Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Printer EKC/ECM Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Printer EKC/ECM Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Reading Counter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 EKC/ECM Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM) . . . . . . 295

Chapter 6 Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301


6-1. Problems with Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
No Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Paper Type Cannot Be Selected.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Page Cannot Be Printed.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Print Settings and Print Results Do Not Match. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplex Printing Is Not Possible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forms Cannot Be Printed.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 302 303 304 304 304

6-2.

Problems Printing with the Adobe PostScript Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . 305


PostScript Error Is Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 [Vmerror], [limitcheck], or Other PostScript Error Is Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 PostScript Error Is Displayed No Matter Which Computer Is Attempting to Print. 305 PostScript Error Is Displayed for Printing from a Specific Application. . . . . . . . . 305 PostScript Error Is Displayed for Printing a Specific File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 PostScript Error Is Displayed for Printing a Specific Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Non Fixed Size Paper (Custom) Cannot Be Printed Correctly with a Macintosh. 305

6-3.

Checking Incomplete Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

III Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307


Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
7-1. 7-2. 7-3. Sending Faxes from the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Registering Recipient Names and their Fax Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Using PC-Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Operating Systems Supported by PC-Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Setting the Fax Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Chapter 8 Sending Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312


8-1. 8-2. 8-3. Transmission Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Fax Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Setting a Cover Sheet (Windows NT/2000/XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 PC-Fax Transmission Error Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

ix

Introduction

Introduction

Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321


9-1. 9-2. Registering Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Registering Recipient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Registering Broadcast Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Managing Phonebooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331


Saving Phonebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Preparing a New Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Switching Between Phonebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

9-3.

Phonebook Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334


Sending Faxes Using the Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

IV Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335


Chapter 10 Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
10-1. Menu Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Displaying the Main Menu Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

10-2. Test Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340


PCL Demo Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCL Font List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS Demo Page (Only When PostScript Option Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS Font List (Only When PostScript Option Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Config.Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 341 342 343 344

10-3. Controller Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345


Banner Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Banner Page Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 PDL Select (Only When PostScript Option Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

10-4. Print Default Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351


Default Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Override Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR/LF Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 353 355 357 359 362 363 364 365 366 367 368

10-5. PCL Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Chapter 11 Key Operator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369


11-1. Key Operator Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Usage Objectives for Key Operator Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Switching the Key Operator Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

11-2. Contents of Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372


Auto Reset Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRINT W/O Key Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Offset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 373 374 375 376

Introduction

Introduction

V Network Print Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377


Chapter 12 Summary of Network Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
12-1. Network Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Features of Network Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use with Peer-to-Peer Connections (Windows 95/98/Me) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use through LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using with UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using with NetWare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using with Macintosh (Only When PostScript Option Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 379 380 380 380 380

Chapter 13 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381


13-1. IP Peer-to-Peer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
14-1. LPD/LPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 14-2. Preparations for Printing with LPD/LPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 14-3. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows NT 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Checking the Network Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Adding a LPD/LPR Printer Port and Installing a Printer Driver (PCL Driver). . . . 387

14-4. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391


Checking the Unix Print Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Adding a LPD/LPR Printer Port and Installing a Printer Driver (PCL Driver). . . . 392

14-5. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396


Checking the Unix Print Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Adding a LPD/LPR Printer Port and Installing a Printer Driver (PCL Driver). . . . 396

Chapter 15 Using with NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401


15-1. Print Controller NetWare Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 15-2. NetWare 3.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Before Setting NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 NetWare Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

15-3. NetWare 4.x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404


Features of NetWare 4.x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 NDS Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Bindery Emulation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP) . . . . . . . 408


16-1. Internet Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 16-2. Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Printing System TCP/IP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 IPP Attribute Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

16-3. Windows 2000 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 16-4. Windows XP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424


17-1. UNIX Printing through TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
xi Introduction

Introduction

17-2. Printing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 17-3. lpd UNIX Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427


Setting Up a BSD Remote Printer to Use lpd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up an AIX Version 2.5 Remote Printer to Use lpd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up an AIX 4.0 System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up an HP-UX Remote Printer to Use lpd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up an AS/400 System to Use lpd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a DEC ULTRIX 4.3 RISC or OSF1 Remote Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a SCO UNIX Remote Printer to Use lpd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up System V Release 4 and Solaris 2.X to Use lpd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing on Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435

Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436


18-1. 18-2. 18-3. 18-4. Preliminary Procedure for Using with AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Controller AppleTalk Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macintosh Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 438 439 440

Selecting the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Chapter 19 When There Is Network Printing Trouble . . . . . . . . 451


19-1. Troubleshooting Network Hardware Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 19-2. NetWare Protocol Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
NetWare Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Server Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workstation Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Server/File Server/Printer Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work Station and Network Controller Connection Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the Connection between the Network Controller and the Novell File Server Is Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 453 454 454 455 455 455

VI Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Chapter 20 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
20-1. When Trouble Occurs in this Printing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Chapter 21 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460


21-1. IP-432 Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Printer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 PC-FAX Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

21-2. IP-424 Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463


Printer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 PC-FAX Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

21-3. PostScript PS-344 Option Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 21-4. PostScript PS-346 Option Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 21-5. Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Memory (IP-432 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hard Disk (IP-432 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CF-101 compact flash ROM (IP-424 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problems with Optional Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 467 467 468

xii

Introduction

Introduction

21-6. Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470


PCL Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Adobe PostScript Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

21-7. Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484


Using the Accessory Screen Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Screen Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Adobe Type Manager (ATM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downloading Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCL Font List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PostScript Font List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 485 488 490 491 496

21-8. Font Number List (Control Panel-PCL Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 21-9. Symbol Sets List (Control Panel-PCL Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 21-10. PCL Macro and Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
PCL macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

21-11. Index According to Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 21-12. Purpose-Oriented Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

xiii

Introduction

Introduction

Package Contents
The following items are supplied with the print controller: Notice Sheet Interface Board User Software CD (Windows) Printer Driver Network Connection Utility Network Setup 2.0 Adobe Acrobat Reader User's Manual Release Note Screenfonts (Macintosh) Adobe Acrobat Reader User's Manual (this manual) (this manual) (describes the latest information as well as limits of the system and the user software.)

The following items are supplied with the PostScript3 option: PS protection chip User Software CD (Including printer driver, Adobe Acrobat Reader, this Users Manual and Release Note*) *Release Note describes the latest information and limits of the system and the user software.

xiv

Introduction

Introduction

System Requirements
Windows
The following are required to print from Windows-compliant computers to the printing system: Computers on which Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP can run CD-ROM drive (necessary to install the printer driver or the scanner driver)

Using Windows 95/98/Me


Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me 32 MB RAM or more

Using Windows NT 4.0


Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 and NT Service Pack 3 or later 32 MB RAM or more

Using Windows 2000/XP


Microsoft Windows 2000/XP 128 MB RAM or more

Macintosh
The following are required to print from the Macintosh to the Print Controller. Computers on which Mac 8.x or higher can run. CD-ROM drive (necessary to install the printer driver) Network Interface (necessary to access printing system)

Parallel Port
The following are required to print to the print controller by way of the parallel port: Windows-compliant computers IEEE 1284 parallel cable One end of the cable is required to have a DB 36 pin male connector (connected to the print controller).

xv

Introduction

Introduction

Folder structure on the CD-ROM (Print controller)


The folders included on the accompanying CD-ROM for the print controller are structured as shown below. This illustration will be helpful for locating specific folders or files. In this manual, folder names and file names are not preceded by the root directory. You may use the files in the English folder.

User Software CD

Windows
English Acroread NetUtil Printer Win9x_Me WinNT_2000_XP Screenfonts UserGuide Others ipmid_int_km_vxxx.pdf (User's Guide for non-USA) (Printer Driver for Windows 95/98/Me) (Printer Driver for Windows NT/2000/XP) (TrueType Screen Fonts) (Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0) (Network Setup 2.0 Program)

netset_e_km_vxxx.pdf (Network Setup 2.0 User's Guide)


USA ipmid_us_vxxx.pdf (User's Guide for USA)

netset_e_km_vxxx.pdf (Network Setup 2.0 User's Guide) French German Italian Spanish

xvi

Introduction

Introduction

Folder structure on the CD-ROM (PostScript3 option)


The folders included on the accompanying CD-ROM for PostScript3 option are structured as shown below. This illustration will be helpful for locating specific folders or files. In this manual, folder names and file names are not preceded by the root directory. You may use the files in the English folder.

User Software CD

Windows
English Acroread Driver AdobePS Win9x_Me WinNT Win2000_XP KONICA MINOLTA PS Win9x_Me WinNT_2000_XP Screenfonts ATM Light PS Screen Fonts UserGuide Others ipmid_int_km_vxxx.pdf pssw2k_int_km_vxxx.pdf USA ipmid_us_vxxx.pdf pssw2k_us_vxxx.pdf (Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0)

(Printer Driver for Windows 95/98/Me) (Printer Driver for Windows NT) (Printer Driver for Windows 2000/XP) (Printer Driver for Windows 95/98/Me) (Printer Driver for Windows NT/2000/XP) (Adobe Type Manager 4.1) (PS3 TrueType/Type1 Screen Fonts)

(User's Guide for non-USA) (KONICA MINOLTA PS Driver User's Guide for non-USA) (User's Guide for USA) (KONICA MINOLTA PS Driver User's Guide for USA)

French Italian German Spanish

Macintosh
English Acroread Driver OS8_x to 9_x OS10.2x Screenfonts ATM Light PS3 TrueType PS3 Type1 UserGuide Others ipmid_int_km_vxxx.pdf USA ipmid_us_vxxx.pdf (Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0) (Printer Driver/PPD file for Power Mac) (Mac OS X Printer Driver) (Adobe Type Manager 4.1) (Screen Fonts for PS3 TrueType) (Screen Fonts for PS3 Type1)

(User's Guide for non-USA) (User's Guide for USA)

French Italian German Spanish

xvii

Introduction

Introduction

About this Manual


This manual is used only for the Print Controller. This manual describes how to operate the Print Controller when the KONICA MINOLTA Copier is connected to computers and used as a printer. This manual assumes you are familiar with the basic operation of your Operating System and the Copier. The copier is separately supplied with users manuals. Refer to these manuals as needed. For detailed operations of Windows 95/98/Me and Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP, refer to the operating manuals for each operating system. For application operations, refer to the operating manuals provided with each application. This manual is composed of the following five volumes and appendices.

I Set Up
This volume summarizes what you can do with the KONICA MINOLTA print controller and explains the operation environment.

II Printer
This volume explains what is necessary when using this printing system as a printer. It covers the printer driver installation method, print settings method, print count management, and what to do in the event of problems.

III Fax
This volume explains what is necessary when using this printing system as a facsimile machine. It covers fax functions in summary and settings methods, transmission methods, and fax number registration method.

IV Control Panel
This volume explains the settings that can be made by the printer administrator using the control panel.

V Network Print Settings


This volume explains necessary settings to use this printing system as a network printer.

VI Appendix
The appendices explain how to handle problems and give the product specifications, a list of built-in fonts, etc.

xviii

Introduction

Introduction

Conventions Used in this Manual


Notation of each product
The following abbreviations are used in this manual: (1) IP-432 Print Controller: (2) IP-424 Print Controller: (3) KONICA MINOLTA 7222/7223/ 7228/7238/7145 Printer/Copier: (4) Internal Network Controller: (5) A combination of the above (1),(2),(3) and (4) products: (6) PS-344 PostScript option (7) PS-346 PostScript option: (8) Microsoft Windows 95: Microsoft Windows 98: Microsoft Windows Me: Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Microsoft Windows 2000: Microsoft Windows XP: Above Operating Systems: Print controller Print controller Copier (or main body printer) network controller printing system PostScript option PostScript option Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 95/98/Me Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP

Notation of names shown on the screen are written within square brackets. (e.g., "click the [OK] button.") Notation of folders
Folders are referred to in upper-to-lower sequence.

For example:
Select the [Printer.inf] file in the "PCL\English\Win9X" folder of the User Software CD.

Notation of a reference to this manual is written within square marks. (e.g., [Chapter 1 Summary]). The following indicates page reference for specific information contained in this manual. (e.g., ( Page 1).
When you click in the page number, you are linked to the reference page.

Screens used with this Manual


The functional descriptions of the printer driver refer to the printer driver for the IP-432 (PS-344).

xix

Introduction

Introduction

Usage of this Manual

3-1. Setting Printer Functions


This is the item title. The printer functions are set by displaying the printer settings screen.

PCL

Adobe PS

When the Adobe PostScript driver is selected, the document size cannot be set. This covers restrictions when functions are combined.

This illustrates that either [PCL] or [Adobe PS] can be used for the printer driver setting. This displays buttons on the control panel. This displays the keys on the LCD screen.

1 2

Press the

(PRINTER) button on the control panel.

Touch the [Printer Set] key.

This is the contents of the screen displayed when an operation is executed.

The related items are explained on the following page. If you click the page number on the PDF, it moves to the referenced page. Sending to an FTP server [Sending to FTP server ] ( Page 325)

This covers important information. Always set irregular size paper in the copier's bypass tray.

From the taskbar, select [Start]- [Settings] - [Printers].


The names of windows, dialog boxes, and icons displayed on the computer screen are written in brackets [ ].

This covers items requiring attention or which are prohibited during operation.

For [Drives:], select the CD-ROM drive. For folder, double-click the [\English\Printer\Win9x_Me] folder.
Folder structure is written in upper to lower sequence.

If there are any files that cannot be deleted, logon again.

xx

Introduction

I Set Up
This volume summarizes what you can do with the KONICA MINOLTA print controller and explains the operating environment.

Chapter 1 Summary............................... 2

I Set Up

Chapter 1 Summary

This chapter explains what you need to know about the print controller, before you begin installation and printing.

1-1. What is the Print Controller? ...............................................................3 1-2. Flow of Processing ...............................................................................8 1-3. Operation Environment ......................................................................10

1-1. What is the Print Controller?


Role of the Print Controller
The printer controller is embedded into the KONICA MINOLTA copier, turning it into a network-capable printing system. You can print and send faxes from applications on the PC connected to the printing system. When using the copier as a network printer, the print controller is used and you can print and send faxes from applications on the PC. Flow for printing (Using as local printer)
Printing system Computer Copier Print Controller

Parallel interface

Flow for printing (Using as USB printer)


Printing system Copier Print Controller USB Network

E-RDH memory

I Set Up Chapter 1 Summary

1-1. What is the Print Controller?


Flow for printing (Using as network printer)
Printing system Copier Print Controller Ethernet Network

HUB

Flow for PC-Fax transmission (Using as local printer)


Printing system Copier Print Controller Computer

Printing with the Copier Fax transmission E-RDH memory

Parallel interface

Flow for PC-Fax transmission (Using as USB printer)


Printing system Copier Print Controller Network

USB

HUB

I Set Up Chapter 1 Summary

1-1. What is the Print Controller?


Flow for PC-Fax transmission (Using as network printer)
Printing system Network Copier Print Controller

Printing with the Copier Fax transmission E-RDH memory

HUB Ethernet

To use the PC-FAX feature of the IP-432, you must install an optional fax kit.

I Set Up Chapter 1 Summary

1-1. What is the Print Controller?

What You Can Do with the Print Controller


The print controller has the following functions. It can receive print commands during printing. Even while the print controller is printing or receiving data from one PC, it can receive print commands from another. This printing system stores data temporarily in the copier's memory and uses the Electronic Recirculating Document Handler (E-RDH) to handle the printing. The standard E-RDH memory is 64 MB, which can hold about 360 pages of A4-size documents. The memory can be expanded to up to 320 MB.
For details on memory, refer to [21-5. Options] ( Page 466)

Functions used with the copier can also be utilized from the PC. Even when using the copier as a printer, duplex printing and paper tray selection can be executed the same as when the unit is used as a copier. Also, stapling and other such functions can be selected if the optional finisher is installed. Managing the number of sheets printed (Printer EKC/ECM) If the [Printer EKC/ECM] function is set, the number of sheets printed for each user can be managed by password. It is possible to reject users without passwords and users who have reached a preset copy or print limit.
For details, refer to [ Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)]. ( Page 295)

The print controller can be used as a fax and printer. The print controller can be used to send faxes directly from the PC.
For details on the fax functions, refer to [ Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)]. ( Page 308)

I Set Up Chapter 1 Summary

1-1. What is the Print Controller?

Four Modes
The printer driver settings are primarily made from the PC, but the font list printing, controller settings, and default settings for printing can be set with the copier control panel. Also, with the print controller, the copier can be used as a copier or scanner by changing the mode. The mode is switched with the [Mode switch] button on the copier control panel.
[Mode switch] button

Copy mode This uses the printer main unit as a copier. Fax mode This uses the printer main unit as a fax machine. Scanner mode This uses the copier as a scanner.
For details on the scanner, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

Printer mode This mode is used for setting the printing system and for outputting lists, confidential documents, etc.

I Set Up Chapter 1 Summary

1-2. Flow of Processing


The general flow of processing for using this printing system as a printer is as follows.

Copy Mode
This printing system can be used as a printer, fax, and scanner and of course, it can also be used as a copier. To use this system as a copier, press the [Mode switch] button the control panel and light up [Copy]. To use the copier if it is receiving a fax or functioning as a printer, pressing the [Mode switch] button lets you make copies. When a print job or fax is received during copying, the data is stored in the copiers E-RDH memory. When the copying ends, the output resumes automatically.
Whether the output is immediate or is scheduled as the next job depends on the copier status.

Flow for Printing


Print commands sent from the application are received by the printer driver. When this printing system is used as a local printer, data is sent to the copier then to the print controller through the parallel interface (IEEE1284) and when it is used as a network printer, the data is sent through the ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX). Image rasterizing processing is executed by the print controller (the characters and images to the output are developed into bitmap data). This data is printed from the copier. When printing with a password, first save the data on copiers optional hard disk (HD-103 Type-A).
Computer Using as local printer Application Using as USB printer Application Using as network printer Application

Printer driver

Printer driver

Printer driver

Parallel interface (IEEE1294)

USB

Ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX)

Copier

Print

E-RDH memory

HD-103 Type-A (Option)

Print

Password Print Print Controller PDL processing (rasterizing)

I Set Up Chapter 1 Summary

1-2. Flow of Processing

PC-Fax Transmission Flow


The transmission command sent from the application is received by the printer driver. When this printing system is used as a local printer, data is sent to the copier then to the print controller through the parallel interface (IEEE1284) and when it is used as a network printer, the data is sent through the ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX). Image rasterizing processing is executed by the print controller (the characters and images to the output are developed into bitmap data). This data is stored in the copiers E-RDH memory is transmitted by fax as a normal fax job.

Computer Using as local printer Application Using as USB printer Application Using as network printer Application

Printer driver

Printer driver

Printer driver

Parallel interface (IEEE1294)

USB

Ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX)

Copier Fax transmission E-RDH memory Print

Print Controller PDL processing (rasterizing)

I Set Up Chapter 1 Summary

1-3. Operation Environment


This section explains the system requirements to use this printing system and the interfaces that can be used for connection.

Operating Systems and Requirements


Windows
Operating system: Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP Memory: 32 MB min. CD-ROM drive

Macintosh
Can only be used if the PostScript option is installed. Operating system: Mac OS 8.x - 9.x/Mac OS X v10.2x CD-ROM drive Network controller

Interfaces Used for Connection


The following two types of interfaces can be used to connect this printing system and the PC.

Parallel interface (included with the copier)


This interface is used when using this printing system as a local printer. Only Windows PCs can be connected through this interface and an IEEE1284 parallel cable is required. Use a parallel cable that has an Amphenol 36-pin male connector at one end. Parallel interface can be used in compatible, nibble, and ECP mode.

USB interface (included with the copier)


This interface is connected when using this printing system as a USB printer. A USB cable is required for connection and only Windows 2000/XP PCs can be connected through this interface. Use A type (4-pin male) and B-type (4-pin male) USB cables. This interface is in compliance with USB1.1. Use of a USB cable which is 3m in length or less is recommended.

Ethernet (included with the copier)


This interface is used when using this printing system as a network printer. This interface supports the 100Base-TX and 10Base-T standards. The protocols supported are TCP/IP (LPD/LPR, Peer-to-Peer), IPX/SPX (NetWare), and AppleTalk (EtherTalk), etc..

10

I Set Up Chapter 1 Summary

1-3. Operation Environment

Connection diagram
Each printer cable should be connected to either the Ethernet port or the Parallel port on the rear side of the copier.
Copier (rear view)

USB port USB cable

Ethernet (100Base-TX/10Base-T) Parallel printer cable Parallel port

11

I Set Up Chapter 1 Summary

II Printer
This volume explains printer usage.

The Flow for Setup ........................................13 Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use......14 Chapter 3 Printing from Windows..............112 Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh.........232 Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM) ..................................295 Chapter 6 Printing Problems ......................301

12

The Flow for Setup


This printing system must be set up before it is used. The setup procedures connect the copier to the computer and install the printer driver in the computer. When using this printing system with your computer for the first time, set up as shown in [New Setup]. To install a new printer driver in a printing system already in use, set up as shown in [Updating a Printer Driver].

New Setup
To set up the first time:

1 2 3

Connect the copier to the computer.


When connecting the copier to the computer, refer to [1-3.Operation Environment] ( page 10).

Install the printer driver.


When installing the print driver, refer to [2-2.Using the Print Controller] ( page 16).

Execute a test print.

Updating a Printer Driver


To update the current printer driver:

1 2 3 4

Delete the current printer driver.


When deleting the current printer driver, refer to [2-9.Updating the Printer Driver] ( page 100).

Restart the computer. Install the new printer driver. Execute test print.

For some printer drivers and Operating Systems, the installation procedure for the printer driver may be different. The procedure for deleting the old printer driver may be different on some Operating Systems.

13

II Printer

II Printer

Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

To use the print controller, first it is necessary to install the printer driver on the PC. This chapter explains the printer driver installation method for each operating system supported. It also explains how to update printer drivers and how to handle problems that might arise during installation.

2-1. Checking the PC..................................................................................15 2-2. Using the Print Controller ..................................................................16 2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me........................18 2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0............................34 2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000 ..............................48 2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP..................................65 2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh ..................................88 2-9. Updating the Printer Driver ..............................................................100 2-10. Installation Problems ......................................................................111

14

2-1. Checking the PC


To use this printing system, it is necessary to install the printer driver. A printer driver is a program that controls processing at data output and is installed on the PC from the [User software CD] before use. The Operating Systems on which this printer driver can be installed are as follows. Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or later) Windows 2000 Windows XP Mac OS 8.x - 9.x (When PostScript Option installed.) Mac OS x v10.2x (When PostScript Option installed.)

15

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-2. Using the Print Controller


This section explains the printer driver installed to use the print controller and the page notation language types.

Printer Driver Types and Supported Operating Systems


The [User software CD] that comes with this printing system contains printer drivers. Install the required printer driver.

PCL Driver
This driver is installed on PCs running Microsoft Windows. The Operating Systems on which this printer driver can be installed are as follows. Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or later) Windows 2000 Windows XP

Adobe PostScript Driver


This driver is installed when the PostScript option is installed. The Operating Systems on which this printer driver can be installed are as follows. Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or later) Windows 2000 Windows XP Mac OS 8.x - 9.x Mac OS X v10.2x

The printer driver is not installable on Mac OS v10.0 or v10.1.

The Adobe PostScript Driver is on the [User software CD] that comes with the PostScript option.

16

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-2. Using the Print Controller

Page Notation Language


Page notation language is a language that describes the characters, pictures, and other print images to the printer when printing data is prepared on a PC. The page notation language used in this printing system are as follows.

When used only with the print controller


PCL is used.

When the PostScript option installed


When the PostScript option is installed, either PCL or AdobePS is used. The printer driver installation methods are explained on the following pages. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0 Using this printing system with Windows 2000 Using this printing system with Windows XP Using this printing system with Macintosh Page 18 Page 34 Page 48 Page 65 Page 88

17

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me


Install the printer driver on the PC running either Windows 95, 98, or Me. Have the [User software CD] CD-ROM on hand.

PCL Driver Installation


This section explains the procedure with the screens of Windows 98.

1 2 3

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running. When installing the Adobe PostScript Driver, refer to [Adobe PostScript Driver Installation].

Page 25)

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

18

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

Click the [Next ] button.

The screen for selecting the connection method is displayed.

When the printer and the computer are directly connected, select [Local printer]. When printing with the printing system connected to another computer via the network, select [Network printer].

Click the [Next ] button.


If you selected [Local printer], proceed to Step 8. If you selected [Network printer], input the [Network path or queue name:], or click the [Browse] button to select it, then click the [Next ] button.

For information about network settings, consult your network administrator.

19

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Open] screen is displayed.

10

For [Drives:], select the CD-ROM drive. For folder, double-click the [\English \Printer\Win9x_Me] folder.

[Setup.inf] is displayed as the [File name:].

11 12

Click the [OK] button.


The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

20

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

13

Ensure that [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx PCL] is displayed in [Printers], then click the [Next ] button.

The screen for selecting the port to be used with the printer is displayed.

14

From the [Available ports:] list, select the port to which this printing system is connected.

For a local printer, select [LPT1].

15 16

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen to confirm the printer name is displayed.

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

21

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

17 18 19

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No]. Click the [Next ] button.
A screen is displayed asking whether or not you want to print a test print.

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Properties]. ( Page 32)

20 21

Click the [Finish] button.


Install the printer driver from the user software CD to the PC and printing of the test page starts.

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [Yes] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] screen. This completes printer driver installation.
If the test page is not printed correctly, refer to [Test Page Cannot Be Printed.] ( Page 111)

22

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] icon, then select [Properties].

The [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx Properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Setup] tab.

23

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

In [Available options:], select the options that are installed on the copier.

For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [Add] button. The selected options are included in [Installed options] and can be used with the printer driver.

24

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

Adobe PostScript Driver Installation

1 2 3

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Put the PostScript option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

25

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

Click the [Next ] button.

The screen for selecting the connection method is displayed.

When the printer and the computer are directly connected, select [Local printer]. When printing with the printing system connected to another computer via the network, select [Network printer].

Click the [Next ] button.


If you selected [Local printer], proceed to Step 8. If you selected [Network printer], input the [Network path or queue name], or click the [Browse] button to select it, then click the [Next ] button.

For information about network settings, consult your network administrator.

26

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Open] screen is displayed.

10

For [Drives], select the CD-ROM drive. For [Folders], double-click the [\English \Driver\AdobePS\Win9x_Me] folder.

[oemsetup.inf] is displayed as the [File name:].

11 12

Click the [OK] button.


The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

27

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

13

Ensure that [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] is displayed in [Printers], then click the [Next ] button.

The screen for selecting the port to be used with the printer is displayed.

14

From the [Available ports:] list, select the port to which this printing system is connected.

For a local printer, select [LPT1].

15 16

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen to confirm the printer name is displayed.

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

28

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

17 18 19

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No]. Click the [Next ] button.
A screen is displayed asking whether or not you want to print a test print.

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Properties]. ( Page 32)

20 21

Click the [Finish] button.


Install the printer driver from the user software CD to the PC and printing of the test page starts.

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [Yes] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] screen. This completes printer driver installation.
If the test page is not printed correctly, refer to [Test Page Cannot Be Printed.] ( Page 111)

29

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] icon, then select [Properties].

The [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS Properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Device Options] tab.

30

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

From among the [Installable options] [Finisher], [Drawer Base], [Large Capacity Tray], and [Memory Configuration], select those options that are installed on the copier, then change the contents.

For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [OK] button. When the option settings are complete, the options can be used with the printer driver.

31

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

Checking Printing
Once the printing system and the computer have been connected and the printer driver installed, printing is possible. Try printing an actual document. You can check printing by executing the test print from the printer driver properties screen or by printing from an application. Print settings The basic print settings are made from the printer driver [Properties] or the applications [Print] screen. When making the print settings from the applications [Print] screen, the settings you make are not saved after that application ends. For details on making the print settings from the printer driver [Properties] screen, refer to [3-1.Setting Printer Functions] ( Page 114).

Executing a test print


The test print prints the standard Windows test page.

1 2

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers]. The [Printers] screen is displayed. Right click the printer icon, then select [Properties].

The printer driver [Properties] screen is displayed.

Select the [General] tab, then click the [Print Test Page] button.

The test page is printed and the check screen is displayed.

32

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me

After checking the printing, click the [Yes] button.

If the test page is not printed correctly, refer to [Test Page Cannot Be Printed.] ( Page 111)

Printing from an application


This method prints data with a [Print] command from an application in use.

1 2

Open data with the application, then execute [Print]. The [Print] screen is displayed. Ensure that the name of this printing system is displayed as the [Name:]. If this printer is not selected, click the [] button to select it.

The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Set the print range and the number of copies, then click the [OK] button. Check that the specified pages are printed.

33

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0


Install the printer driver on the PC running Windows NT 4.0. Have the [User software CD] CD-ROM on hand.

Access Rights and Range of Operation


Since Windows NT 4.0 is an operating system designed for network management, security functions are stronger than for Windows 95, 98, or Me. When a new printer is added, the range of allowable operations can be specified according to the security level (access rights) of the user. The Windows NT 4.0 printer access rights and range of global operations are as follows. After installing the printer driver, set the access rights for users.
Access rights Off Range of allowable operations Printer operations disabled Document printing Print parameter setting Print related (paper size, input tray, and other selections) Graphic related (resolution, half tone, and other settings) Printer functions (selection of functions unique to a copier) Document setting control Print pause, restart, reprint, cancel All [print] and [document management] items Printer pause, restart, all document cancel Printer cancel Printer access rights setting and change

Printing

Document management

Full control

For details on setting printer access rights, refer to the Windows NT 4.0 System Guide.

Refer to the page below for the driver installed. PCL Driver installation Adobe PostScript Driver installation
page 35 page 39

34

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

PCL Driver Installation

1 2 3 4 5

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has incorporating those of a Power User.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From [My Computer], select the [CD-ROM] and then double-click [Setup.exe] in [English] - [Printer] - [WinNT_2000_XP] folder. Click the [OK] button.

The [Printer Driver Installer] screen is displayed.

Set up the following items.

35

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

[Printer Name]

Check the printer name. To change it, input a new printer name.

[Selecting the Printer Port]

Select the port to which the printer is connected.

[Install as the Default Printer]

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, check the [Install as the Default Printer] checkbox.

36

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

When all the settings are complete, click the [Install] button.

Click the [Finished] button.

This completes printer driver installation.

37

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] icon, then select [Properties].

The [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] screen is displayed.

3 4

Click the [Options] tab. In [Available options:], select the options that are installed on the copier.

For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [Add] button. The selected options are included in [Installed options] and can be used with the printer driver.

38

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

Adobe PostScript Driver Installation

1 2 3 4

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights incorporating those of a Power User.

Put the PostScript option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

39

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

When connecting the printer directly to the PC or when installing the printer driver on the PC that manages the printer, select [My Computer]. When printing via the network with the printing system connected to another PC, select [Network printer server]. ( Page 41)

Before you can select [Network printer server], the network controller and PC network settings must be complete. For details, consult your network administrator.

When [My Computer] is selected

1 2

Click the [Next ] button. The printer port select screen is displayed. Click on the checkbox for the port to which the printer is connected.

When the printer and the PC are directly connected, select the [LPT port]. When printing directly with the printing system via the network, select the [LPR port]. ( Page 387)

Click the [Next ] button. A screen to confirm the printer manufacturer and name is displayed. Proceed to Step 7.

40

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

When [Network printer server] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The [Printer connection] screen is displayed.

Either input the printer path at [Printer] or select [Shared Printers:], then click the [OK] button.

A screen to confirm the printer manufacturer and name is displayed. Proceed to Step 7
For information about network settings, consult your network administrator.

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

41

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

From [Look in:], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\Driver \AdobePS\WinNT] folder.

[Oemsetup] is displayed as the [File name:].

10 11

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

42

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

12

Ensure that [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] is selected in [Printers], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen to confirm the printer name is displayed.

13

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

14 15

Click the [Next ] button.


The screen to comfirm whether or not the printer is shared is displayed.

To share the printer, select [Shared]; to not share it, select [Not shared].

To assign a share name to the printer, input the share name.

43

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

16 17 18

If necessary, select the substitute driver for the network client.

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed asking whether or not you want to print a test print.

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Properties]. ( Page 46)

19 20

Click the [Finish] button.


Install the printer driver on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [Yes] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] screen. This completes printer driver installation.
If the test page is not printed correctly, refer to [Test Page Cannot Be Printed.] ( Page 111)

44

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] icon, then select [Properties].

The [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS Properties] screen is displayed.

3 4

Click the [Device Settings] tab. In [Installable Options], select the options installed on the copier, then change the contents.

For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [OK] button. When the option settings are complete, the options can be used with the printer driver.

45

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

Checking Printing
Once the printing system and the computer have been connected and the printer driver installed, printing is possible. Try printing an actual document. You can check printing by executing the test print from the printer driver properties or by printing from an application. Print settings The basic print settings are made from the printer driver [Properties] or the applications [Print] screen. When making the print settings from the applications [Print] screen, the settings you make are not saved after that application ends. For details on making the print settings from the printer driver [Properties] screen, refer to [3-1.Setting Printer Functions] ( Page 117).

Executing a test print


The test print prints the standard Windows test page.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the printer icon, then select [Properties].

The printer driver [Properties] screen is displayed.

46

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0

Select the [General] tab, then click the [Print Test Page] button.

The test page is printed and the check screen is displayed.

After confirming that the test printed correctly, click the [Yes] button.

If the test page is not printed correctly, refer to [Test Page Cannot Be Printed.] ( Page 111)

Printing from an application


This method prints data with a [Print] command from an application in use.

1 2

Open data with the application, then execute [Print]. The [Print] screen is displayed. Ensure that the name of this printing system is displayed as the [Name:]. If this printer is not selected, click the [] button to select it.

The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Set the print range and the number of copies, then click the [OK] button. Check that the specified pages are printed.

47

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000


Install the printer driver on the PC running Windows 2000. Have the [User software CD] CD-ROM on hand.

Access Rights and Range of Operation


Since Windows 2000 is an operating system designed for network management, security functions are stronger than for Windows 95/98/Me. When a new printer is added, the range of allowable operations can be specified according to the security level (access rights) of the user. The Windows 2000 printer access rights and range global operations are as follows. After installing the printer driver, set the access rights for users.
Access rights Off Range of allowable operations Printer operations disabled Document printing Print parameter setting Print related (paper size, input tray, and other selections) Graphic related (resolution, half tone, and other settings) Printer functions (selection of functions unique to a copier) All [Print] items Print pause, restart, and spooler settings Printer property change Printer access rights setting and change Document setting control Print pause, restart, reprint, cancel

Printing

Printer management

Document management

For details on setting printer access rights, refer to the Windows 2000 System Guide.

Refer to the page below for the driver installed. PCL Driver installation Adobe PostScript Driver installation
page 49 page 53

48

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

PCL Driver Installation

1 2 3 4 5

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights incorporating those of a Power User.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.

From [My Computer], select the [CD-ROM] and then double-click [Setup.exe] in the [English] - [Printer] - [WinNT_2000_XP] folder.

Click the [OK] button.

The [Printer Driver Installer] screen is displayed.

Set up the following items.

49

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

[Printer Name]

Check the printer name. To change it, input a new printer name.

[Selecting the Printer Port]

Select the port to which the printer is connected.

[Install as the Default Printer]

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, check the [Install as the Default Printer] checkbox.

50

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

When all the settings are complete, click the [Install] button.

Click the [Finished] button.

This completes printer driver installation.

51

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] icon, then select [Properties].

The [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx Properties] screen is displayed.

3 4

Click the [Options] tab. In [Available options:], select the options that are installed on the copier.

For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [Add] button. The selected options are included in [Installed options] and can be used with the printer driver.

52

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

Adobe PostScript Driver Installation

1 2 3 4

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights incorporating those of a Power User.

Put the Post Scripit option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

Click the [Next ] button.

53

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

When connecting the printer directly to the PC, select [Local printer]. When printing via the network with the printing system connected to another PC, select [Network printer]. ( Page 56)

Ensure that the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play Printer] checkbox is not checked. Before you can select [Network printer server], the network controller and PC network settings must be complete. For details, consult your network administrator.

54

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

When [Local printer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The printer port select screen is displayed.

Select the port to which the printer is connected.

When the printer and the PC are directly connected, select the [LPT port]. When printing directly with the printing system via the network, select the [LPR port]. ( Page 392)

Click the [Next ] button. A screen to confirm the printer manufacturer and name is displayed. Proceed to Step 8.

55

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

When [Network printer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The [Locate Your Printer] screen is displayed.

Input the printer name in [Name:], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen to confirm the printer manufacturer and name is displayed. Proceed to Step 8.

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

56

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate file] screen is displayed.

10

From [Look in], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\Driver \AdobePS\Win2000_XP] folder.

[OEMSETUP] is displayed as the [File name:].

11 12

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

57

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

13

Ensure that [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] is selected in [Printers], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen to confirm the printer name is displayed.

14

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

15 16

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No]. Click the [Next ] button.
The screen to comfirm whether or not the printer is shared is displayed.

58

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

17

To share the printer, select [Share as:]; to not share it, select [Do not share this printer].

To assign a share name to the printer, input the share name.

18 19

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed checking whether or not you want to print a test print.

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Properties]. ( Page 62)

20

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed announcing that the [Add Printer Wizard] is complete.

59

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

21

Click the [Finish] button.

Install the printer driver on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

22

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [OK] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] screen. This completes printer driver installation.
If the test page is not printed correctly, refer to [Test Page Cannot Be Printed.] ( Page 111)

60

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] icon, then select [Properties].

The [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xx PS Properties] screen is displayed.

3 4

Click the [Device Settings] tab. In [Installable Options], select the options installed on the copier, then change the contents.

For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [OK] button. When the option settings are complete, the options can be used with the printer driver.

61

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

Checking Printing
Once the printing system and the computer have been connected and the printer driver installed, printing is possible. Try printing an actual document. You can check printing by executing the test print from the printer driver properties or by printing from an application. Print settings The basic print settings are made from the printer driver [Properties] or the applications [Print] screen. When making the print settings from the applications [Print] screen, the settings you make are not saved after that application ends. For details on making the print settings from the printer driver [Properties] screen, refer to [3-1.Setting Printer Functions] ( Page 121).

Executing a test print


The test print prints the standard Windows test page.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the printer icon, then select [Properties].

The printer driver [Properties] screen is displayed.

62

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

Select the [General] tab, then click the [Print Test Page] button.

The test page is printed and the check screen is displayed.

After checking the printing, click the [OK] button.

If the test page is not printed correctly, refer to [Test Page Cannot Be Printed.] ( Page 111)

63

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this Printing System with Windows 2000

Printing from an application


This method prints data with the [Print] command from an application.

1 2

Open data with the application, then execute [Print]. The [Print] screen is displayed. Ensure that the name of the printer you want to print on is selected in [Select Printer]. If this printer is not selected, click its icon to select it.

The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Set the print range and the number of copies, then click the [Print] button. Check that the specified pages are printed.

64

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP


Install the printer driver on the computer running Windows XP. Have the [User software CD] CD-ROM on hand.

Access Rights and Range of Operation


When a new printer is added, the range of allowable operations can be specified according to the security level (access rights) of the user. The Windows XP printer access rights and range of operations are as follows. After installing the printer driver, set the access rights for users.
Access rights Off Range of allowable operations Printer operations disabled Document printing Print parameter setting Print related (paper size, input tray, and other selections) Graphic related (resolution, half tone, and other settings) Printer functions (selection of functions unique to a copier) All [Print] items Print pause, restart, and spooler settings Printer property change Printer access rights setting and change Document setting control Print pause, restart, reprint, cancel

Printing

Printer management

Document management

For details on setting printer access rights, refer to the Windows XP System Guide.

Refer to the page below for the driver installed. PCL Driver installation Adobe PostScript Driver installation
page 66 Page 71

65

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

PCL Driver Installation

1 2 3 4 5

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights incorporating those of a Power User.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.

From [My Computer], select the [CD-ROM] and then double-click [Setup.exe] in the [English] - [Printer] - [WinNT_2000_XP] folder.

Click the [OK] button.

The [Printer Driver Installer] screen is displayed.

Set up the following items.

66

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

[Printer Name]

Check the printer name. To change it, input a new printer name.

[Selecting the Printer Port]

Select the port to which the printer is connected.

[Install as the Default Printer]

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, check the [Install as the Default Printer] checkbox.

67

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

When all the settings are complete, click the [Install] button.

Click the [Finished] button.

This completes printer driver installation.

68

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] icon, then select [Properties].

The [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx Properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Options] tab.

69

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

In [Available options], select the options that are installed on the copier.

For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [Add] button. The selected options are included in [Installed options] and can be used with the printer driver.

70

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

Adobe PostScript Driver Installation

1 2 3 4

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with an account that has [computer administrator] rights. Put the Post Script option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

Click the [Add a printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

71

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

Click the [Next ] button.

When connecting the printer directly to the PC, select [Local printer attached to this computer]. When printing via the network with the printing system connected to another PC, select [A Network printer, or a printer attached to another computer]. ( Page 74)

Ensure that the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer] checkbox is not checked. Before you can select [Network printer server], the network controller and PC network settings must be complete. For details, consult your network administrator.

72

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

When [Local printer attached to this computer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The printer port select screen is displayed.

Select the port to which the printer is connected.

When the printer and the PC are directly connected, select the [LPT] port. When printing directly with the printing system via the network, select the [LPR] port. ( Page 396)

Click the [Next ] button. A screen to confirm the printer manufacturer and name is displayed. Proceed to Step 8.

73

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

When [A Network printer, or a printer attached to another computer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The [Specify a Printer] screen is displayed.

Input the printer name in [Name:], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen to confirm the printer manufacturer and name is displayed. Proceed to Step 8.

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

74

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

10

From [Look in:], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\Driver \AdobePS\Win2000_XP] folder.

[OEMSETUP.INF] is displayed as the [File name:].

11 12

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add printer wizard] screen.

75

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

13

Ensure that [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] is displayed in [Printers], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen to confirm the printer name is displayed.

14

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

15 16

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No]. Click the [Next ] button.
A screen is displayed checking whether or not you want to print a test print.

76

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

17

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Properties]. ( Page 80)

18 19

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed announcing that the [Add Printer Wizard] is complete.

Click the [Finish] button.

20

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [OK] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers and Faxes] window. This completes printer driver installation.
If the test page is not printed correctly, refer to [Test Page Cannot Be Printed.] ( Page 111)

77

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] icon, then select [Properties].

The [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS Properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Device Settings] tab.

78

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

In [Installable Options], select the options installed on the copier, then change the contents.

For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [OK] button. When the option settings are complete, the options can be used with the printer driver.

79

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

Checking Printing
Once the printing system and the computer have been connected and the printer driver installed, printing is possible. Try printing an actual document. You can check printing by executing the test print from the printer driver properties or by printing from an application. Print settings The basic print settings are made from the printer driver [Properties] or the applications [Print] screen. When making the print settings from the applications [Print] screen, the settings you make are not saved after that application ends. For details on making the print settings from the printer driver [Properties] screen, refer to [3-1.Setting Printer Functions] ( Page 125).

Executing a test print


The test print prints the standard Windows test page.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

Right click the printer icon, then select [Properties].

The printer driver [Properties] screen is displayed.

80

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

Select the [General] tab, then click the [Print Test Page] button.

The test page is printed and the check screen is displayed.

After checking the printing, click the [OK] button.

If the test page is not printed correctly, refer to [Test Page Cannot Be Printed.] ( Page 111)

81

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this Printing System with Windows XP

Printing from an application


This method prints data with a [Print] command from an application in use.

1 2

Open data with the application, then execute [Print]. The [Print] screen is displayed. Ensure that the name of the printer you want to print on is selected in [Select printer]. If this printer is not selected, click its icon to select it.

The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Set the print range and the number of copies, then click the [Print] button. Check that the specified pages are printed.

82

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-7. Using as a USB Printer (Windows 2000/XP)


Install a printer driver in the personal computer which will use the copier as a USB printer. Prepare the accessory CD-ROM [User Software CD] which comes with the copier.

The copier cannot be used as a USB printer with operating systems other than Windows 2000/XP. Use of a USB cable which is 3m in length or less is recommended.

Refer to the OS you are using for the [Access Rights and Range of Operation].

Windows 2000 Windows XP

Page 48 Page 65

Installing a Printer Driver

1 2 3 4

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights incorporating those of a Power User.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. Connect a USB cable to the personal computer and the copier.

The following message box appears and the [Detect New Hardware Wizard] is displayed on the screen.
Use Type A (4-pin male) - Type B (4-pin male) USB cables.

83

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-7. Using as a USB Printer (Windows 2000/XP)

Click the [Next >] button.

Check [Search for a suitable driver for my device] and click the [Next >] button.

Check the [Specify a location] check box and click [Next >].

84

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-7. Using as a USB Printer (Windows 2000/XP)

Click the [Browse...] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

From the [Locate File], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [/English/ Printer/WinNT_2000_XP] folder.

The Setup information is displayed.

10 11

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Found New Hardware Wizard] screen.

Click the [OK] button.

85

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-7. Using as a USB Printer (Windows 2000/XP)

12

Click the [Next >] button.

The [Digital Signature Not Found] screen is displayed.


If the driver name is not correct, click [< Back] and repeat from step 8.

13

Click the [Yes] button.

The [Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard] screen is displayed.

86

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-7. Using as a USB Printer (Windows 2000/XP)

14

Click the [Finish] button.

This completes installation of the printer driver.


When printing a test page, refer to [Checking Printing]. Windows 2000 Page 62 Windows XP Page 80

87

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh


Install the printer driver on the Macintosh. Have the PostScript option accessory [User software CD] on hand.

Adobe PostScript Driver Installation


The installation location depends on the Macintosh model and the Mac OS version. When installing on a Power Macintosh, check the Mac OS version. For a Power Macintosh with Mac OS 8.x or higher up to version 9.x. Refer to the user software CD [English] - [Driver] - [OS8_x to 9_x] folder. For Mac OS X v10.2x Refer to the user software CD [English] - [Driver] - [OS X] folder.
For details on the installation, refer to [Mac OS X v10.2x Version Installation] ( page 91).

The printer driver is not installable on Mac OS v10.0 or v10.1.

After installing the printer driver, it is recommended to re-start the computer. If Adobe PostScript has been installed before the driver for this printing system is installed, that version is overwritten by the Adobe PostScript that comes with this printing system.

88

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh

Mac OS 8.x or higher up to version 9.x Instllation

Switch on the power for the Macintosh and start the Mac OS.
Close down any applications that are running.

2 3 4

Put the PostScript option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. Double click the [English] - [Driver] folder on the user software CD. Double click [OS8_x to 9_x], then select [Koxxxxx.ppd] and copy to the computers [HDD] [System Folder] - [Expansions] - [Printer Descriptions].

In the folder where the user software CD printer driver is stored, double-click [Adobe PS Installer].

The [Adobe PostScript Driver] screen is displayed.

Click the [Continue] button.

The [License] screen is displayed.

89

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh

Click the [Accept] button.

[Adobe PostScript English-language installer] screen is displayed.

Click the [Install] button.

Install the printer driver on the computer. When the installation is complete, a message is displayed.

Click the [Restart] button.

90

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh

Mac OS X v10.2x Version Installation

The printer driver is not installable on Mac OS v10.0 or v10.1.

1 2

Power ON PC and startup Macintosh. Setup [User Software CD] on PC CD-ROM drive.
Close all running application, if any.

3 4 5

From [User Software CD] - [English], double-click [Driver] folder. Select [IP-xxxPrinter.pkg] and copy it onto desktop. Double-click on [IP-xxxPrinter.pkg].

[Welcome to the KONICA MINOLTA Printer Driver Installer] screen appears.

When the system prompts to enter the name and password of the administrator, enter the name and password of the administrator.

Clicking the [Cancel] button at this point exits the installer. For information about the name and password of the administrator, consult the system administrator.

91

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh

Click the [Continue] button.

[Important Information] screen appears.

Click the [Continue] button.

[Software License Agreement] screen appears.

Click the [Continue] button.

10

Click the [Agree] button.

[Select a Destination] screen appears.

92

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh

11

Select a disk to be installed and then click the [Continue] button.

[Easy Install] screen appears.

12

Click the [Install] button.

Printer driver will be installed on PC. When the installation completes, a message appears.
When reinstallation is carried out, the indication [Install] may be changed to [Upgrade].

13

Click the [Close] button.

The printer driver is installed now.

93

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh

Selecting the Printer


Mac OS 8.x or higher up to version 9.x
When you select the printer to use with [Chooser], you can use the printer.

Select [Apple] Menu - [Chooser].

The [Chooser] screen is displayed.

Check that [AppleTalk] is set to [Active], then click the [AdobePS] icon.

Click the printer name applicable to the printing system from the [Select a PostScript Printer] list, and click the [Setup] button.

The selection screen for the Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is displayed.
The indication [Setup] may be changed to [Create] may be displayed.

94

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh

Click the applicable PPD file and click the [Select] button.

The additional option setting screen is displayed.

Click the [ ] button for each item to set the options installed on the copier.

For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

6 7

Click the [OK] button. The display returns to the [Selector] screen. Close the [Chooser] screen.

95

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh

Mac OS X v10.2x
[Print Center] enables you to select a printer you want to use.

From installed [HDD] - [Applications] - [Utilities], double-click on [Print Center].

Click the [Add] button.

If the applicable printer is set, the illustration of 2 is not displayed.

Select the corresponding printer name.

96

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh

Click [Printer Model] and select [KONICA MINOLTA].

Select the model name to be used and then click the [Add] button.

The selected printer is registered to [Printer List].

From Menu - [Printers], select [Show Info].

[Printer Info] screen will be displayed.

97

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh

Select [Installable Options].

Setup the options that are equipped to copier.

10

Click the [Apply Changes] button.

11

Close [Print Info] screen.

98

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Using this Printing System with a Macintosh

Checking Printing
Once the printing system and the computer have been connected and the printer driver installed, printing is possible. Try printing from the [Print] command of an application.

1 2

Open a file with an application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.

Check that this printing system is selected in [Printer].

If this printer is not displayed, select this printer in [Chooser]. (Page 94) The [Print] screen varies according to the application. When you click the [Save settings] button, the contents of the settings are saved.

Set the number of copies and the print range, then click the [Print] button.
Check that the specified pages are printed.

99

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-9. Updating the Printer Driver


Refer to the appropriate information below. Updating the printer driver with Windows 95/98/Me Updating the printer driver with Windows NT 4.0 Updating the printer driver with Windows 2000 Updating the printer driver with Windows XP Updating the printer driver with Macintosh Page 101 Page 104 Page 105 Page 107 Page 109

100

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-9. Updating the Printer Driver

Updating the Printer Driver with Windows 95/98/Me

1 2

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] icon or the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] icon, then select [Delete].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

4 5

Click the [Yes] button.

Restart the computer.


This completes the deletion of the printer driver.

101

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-9. Updating the Printer Driver

Go to [Installing a Printer Driver].


When installing the print driver, refer to [2-3.Using this Printing System with Windows 95/98/Me] ( page 18).

102

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-9. Updating the Printer Driver

Updating the Printer Driver with Windows NT 4.0

1 2 3 4 5

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has installing rights such as a Power User.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From [My Computer], select the [CD-ROM] and then double click the [Setup. exe] in the [English] - [Printer] - [WinNT_2000_XP] folder. Click the [OK] button.

The [Printer Driver Installer] screen is displayed.

The screen shown below appears. Then click [No].

Click the [Remove a Driver] tub.

103

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-9. Updating the Printer Driver

Select the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx].

Click the [Remove] button.

10

Click the [Yes] button.

The Printer driver is deleted (Uninstalled).

11 12

Restart the computer.


This completes the deletion of the printer driver.

Go to [Installing a Printer Driver].


When installing the print driver, refer to [2-4.Using this Printing System with Windows NT 4.0] ( page 34).

104

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-9. Updating the Printer Driver

Updating the Printer Driver with Windows 2000

1 2 3 4 5

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has installing rights such as a Power User.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From [My Computer], select the [CD-ROM] and then double click the [Setup. exe] in the [English] - [Printer] - [WinNT_2000_XP] folder. Click the [OK] button.

The [Printer Driver Installer] screen is displayed.

The screen shown below appears. Then click [No].

Click the [Remove a Driver] tub.

105

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-9. Updating the Printer Driver

Select the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx].

Click the [Remove] button.

10

Click the [Yes] button.

The Printer driver is deleted (Uninstalled).

11 12

Restart the computer.


This completes the deletion of the printer driver.

Go to [Installing a Printer Driver].


When installing the print driver, refer to [2-5.Using this Printing System with Windows 2000] ( page 48).

106

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-9. Updating the Printer Driver

Updating the Printer Driver with Windows XP

1 2 3 4 5

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has installing rights such as a Power User.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From [My Computer], select the [CD-ROM] and then double click the [Setup. exe] in the [English] - [Printer] - [WinNT_2000_XP] folder. Click the [OK] button.

The [Printer Driver Installer] screen is displayed.

The screen shown below appears. Then click [No].

Click the [Remove a Driver] tub.

107

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-9. Updating the Printer Driver

Select the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx].

Click the [Remove] button.

10

Click the [Yes] button.

The Printer driver is deleted (Uninstalled).

11 12

Restart the computer.


This completes the deletion of the printer driver.

Go to [Installing a Printer Driver].


When installing the print driver, refer to [2-6.Using this Printing System with Windows XP] ( page 65).

108

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-9. Updating the Printer Driver

Updating the Printer Driver with Macintosh


Mac OS 8.x or higher up to version 9.x

Switch on the power for the Macintosh and start the Mac OS.
Close down any applications that are running.

2 3

Select the printer icon to delete from the desktop and drag it to the recycle bin. The printer driver is uninstalled. In [HDD] - [System folder] - [Expansion functions] - [Printer notation file], select [koxxxxx.PPD] and drag it to the recycle bin. Printer driver related files are deleted.
If old driver files are left, they can cause problems with driver updating. Before updating the printer, delete the old driver without fail.

4 5

Restart the computer. This completes the deletion of the printer driver. Continuously go to [Install the printer driver].
When installing the print driver, refer to [2-8.Using this Printing System with a Macintosh] ( page 94).

109

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-9. Updating the Printer Driver

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2 3

Switch on the power for the Macintosh and start the Mac OS. Double-click the [Print Center]. Select the name of the printer to be deleted and click the [Delete] button.

The selected printer is deleted.

4 5

Close the [Printer List]. Double-click the [HDD] on which the printer driver was installed, then from [Libraries] [Printers] - [PPDs] - [Contents] - [Resources] - [en.lprej], select [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS v**] and drag it to the recycle bin. Double-click the [HDD] on which the printer driver was installed, then from the [Libraries] [Printers] - [PPD Plugins], drag the following 3 folders to the recycle bin. KONICA MINOLTA Setup.plugin KONICA MINOLTA Finishing.plugin KONICA MINOLTA ImageLayout.plugin Printer driver related files are deleted.
Delete the old driver without fail before updating the driver software. If any old driver file is left, some malfunction may occur in updating the driver.

7 8

Restart the computer. This completes the deletion of the printer driver. Continuously go to [Install the printer driver].
When installing the print driver, refer to [2-8.Using this Printing System with a Macintosh] ( page 96).

110

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-10. Installation Problems


If you run into any problems during installation, check the following information.

An Old Version of the Driver Is Already Installed.


If an old version of the [PCL] driver is already installed, delete it, then install the newer driver. For details on how to update the driver, refer to [2-9.Updating the Printer Driver] ( Page 100).

You Are Asked Which File to Use, the One You Are Installing or a New File Already on the Computer.
When you install a printer driver, the computer may already have a more recent file with the same name as the one on the [User software CD]. In this case, select the file with the more recent date. If you use the file with the older date, the operating system may not operate normally.

Test Page Cannot Be Printed.

1 2 3 4 5

Check the copier control panel LCD screen.


If nothing at all is displayed, proceed to next. If [Ready to Copy] is displayed, proceed to Step 3. If a diagnostics message or error message is displayed, refer to the copier users manual.

Press the sub power switch on the control panel.


If the copier is in auto shut-off mode, pressing this button puts the LCD screen into display mode.

Check that copying is possible.


If copying is possible, proceed to next.

Switch off the power for the copier, wait about 10 seconds, then switch the power back on again. Once the print controller can be used, print a test page again.
If the test page cannot be printed, contact your authorized service representative.

111

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

II Printer

Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

When the printer has been made ready for use, various printing methods and function settings can be made from the [Properties] screen. This chapter explains the printer functions and setting methods for printing with Windows.

3-1. Setting Printer Functions .................................................................113 3-2. Function List......................................................................................130 3-3. Basic Print Settings ..........................................................................132 3-4. Printing Multiple Pages ....................................................................149 3-5. Making Image Settings .....................................................................187 3-6. Setting the Font .................................................................................196 3-7. Special Printing .................................................................................203 3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer .........220

112

3-1. Setting Printer Functions


The printer functions are set by displaying the printer settings screen. The settings screen comprises multiple screens called [tabs] for different choices. Click the tab for the function to set the choices.
Tab

There are two methods for displaying the settings screen: This section explains the method for displaying the screen for setting the printer functions. Setting from the [Properties] screen Right click the printer icon, then set from the [Properties] screen. The choices of these settings apply to all applications used on this computer. Setting on an application Settings are made from the screen displayed when the [Print] command is executed from an application. These settings only remain in effect while the application is being used. When the application ends, the settings are deleted. Refer to the appropriate page below for the OS you use: Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0 Using this printing system with Windows 2000 Using this printing system with Windows XP Page 114 Page 117 Page 121 Page 125

113

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions

Windows 95/98/Me
Setting from the [Properties] screen

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The printer screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] icon or the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] icon, then select [Properties].

The [Properties] screen is displayed. PCL driver

114

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions


PostScript driver

Setting on the application

Open a file with an application, then execute [Print]. The [Print] screen is displayed.
The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Click the [Properties] button.

The [Properties] screen is displayed. PCL driver

115

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions


PostScript driver

116

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions

Windows NT 4.0
Setting from the [Properties] screen
This sets the printer port and options.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] icon or the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] icon, then select [Properties].

The [Properties] screen is displayed. PCL driver

117

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions


PostScript driver

Setting from the [Document Defaults] screen


This makes the basic print settings.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] icon or the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] icon, then select [Document Defaults].

The [Document Defaults] screen is displayed.

118

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions


PCL driver

PostScript driver

Setting on the application

Open a file with an application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Click the [Property] button.

The [Properties] screen is displayed.

119

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions


PCL driver

PostScript driver

120

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions

Windows 2000
Setting from the [Properties] screen
This sets the printer port and options.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] icon or the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] icon, then select [Properties].

The [Properties] screen is displayed. PCL driver

121

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions


PostScript driver

Setting from the [Printing Preferences] screen


This makes the basic print settings.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] icon or the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] icon, then select [Printing Preferences].

The settings screen is displayed.

122

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions


PCL driver

PostScript driver

123

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions

Setting on the application

1 2

Open a file with an application, then execute [Print]. The [Print] screen is displayed. Right click the printer icon, then select [Properties].

The [Properties] screen is displayed.


The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

PCL driver

PostScript driver

124

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions

Windows XP
Setting from the [Properties] screen
This sets the printer port and options.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] icon or the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] icon, then select [Properties].

The [Properties] screen is displayed.

125

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions


PCL driver

PostScript driver

Setting from the [Printing Preferences] screen


This makes the basic print settings.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

126

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions

Right click the [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] icon or the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx PS] icon, then select [Printing Preferences].

The [Printing Preferences] screen is displayed. PCL driver

PostScript driver

127

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions

Setting on the application

1 2

Open a file with an application, then execute [Print]. The [Print] screen is displayed. Right click the printer icon, then select [Properties].

The [Properties] screen is displayed.


The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

PCL driver

PostScript driver

128

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-1. Setting Printer Functions

Image View
If you set the properties using the [PCL] driver, you can check the current setting status. This switches between paper display and copier display.

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


Paper
A sample of the printed paper is displayed.

Main unit
The settings of the Input tray and Output tray are displayed.

129

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-2. Function List


This list contains a summary of the main settings related to printing.

The names of the functions are basically those displayed in Windows95/98/Me. The display of listed items and setting values may vary according to whether options are present (and their settings). For details on functions not covered here, refer to your Windows guide.
Operating Systems supported 95/98/Me NT 4.0 2000/XP Basic print settings Setting the printer languages Copies Orientation Paper size Media Type/Paper Type Scaling Paper Source Output Tray Margins Sets the printer language for printing. Specifies the number of copies to print. Selects landscape or portrait direction to print on the paper. Sets the size of the paper to print on. Sets the type of the media for printing. Prints enlarged/reduced. Selects the input tray containing the paper to print on. Selects the tray which to output printed material. Sets the width for the margin (the section not printed at all) for printing Printing multiple pages Duplex Prints consecutive pages on the front and back. Combines multiple pages of consecutive data on one side of one sheet of paper and automatically reduces the multiple pages to match the paper size. Prints swapping the order of the pages so that the output paper can be compiled and folded in two to make a booklet. Processes a sheet for fold & stitch, then delivers it. Prints one copy at a time of all the pages. Printing multiple copies, this shifts the output position for each set. Staples. Punch holes in the document

Function

Summary

Reference

Page 132 Page 134 Page 136 Page 138 Page 140 Page 142 Page 144 Page 146 Page 148

Page 153

Pages per sheet/Layout

Page 155

Combination

Page 158

Fold/Stitch Collate/Sort Collate/Offset Staple Punch/Punch Hole

Page 161 Page 164 Page 166 Page 169 Page 173

130

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-2. Function List


Operating Systems supported 95/98/Me NT 4.0 2000/XP Printing multiple pages Front Cover/Back Cover Sheet Insertion Prints attaching a front or back cover. Insert the selected sheet for the document being printed. Making image settings Graphics Resolution Print as a negative image Print as a mirror image Makes settings concerning the print quality for photographs and other images. Sets the resolution for printing. Prints with black and white reversed. Prints with left and right reversed. Setting the font TrueType font settings PostScript font settings Sets the replacement of TrueType fonts used in the data with the printers fonts. Makes settings concerning PostScript fonts and output. Special printing Overlay Watermark Password Print Prints overlaying separate from data. Prints [CONFIDENTIAL] or another preset text as a watermark. Prints after a registered User ID and password are input.

Function

Summary

Reference

Page 177

Page 187 Page 192 Page 193 Page 195

Page 196 Page 197

Page 204 Page 207 Page 211

Seting the connection between the computer and printer Printer driver selection Time out time Port settings Printer port assignment Deleting the printer port Port addition/deletion Spool settings Checks the printer driver version and adds new printer drivers. Sets the wait time until the printer is in a usable state. Makes settings for the LPT port to which the printer is connected. Assigns a network printer to a virtual printer port. Ends the setting for the set port. Adds or deletes a network or local printer. Sets the method for temporarily accumulating the print data when it is sent to the printer.

Page 221 Page 221 Page 222

Page 222 Page 222 Page 223 Page 223

131

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings


PCL

Setting the Printer Languages


This sets the printer language for printing. PCL-5E (Monochrome) PCL-6 (Monochrome)

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

With the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Options] tab. In [Printer language], select printer language.

132

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)


PCL-5E PCL-XL

With the PCL driver [Printing Preferences], select the [Graphics] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

In [Printer language], select printer language.

133

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings


PCL Adobe PS

Setting the Number of Copies to Print (Copies).


Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. For the [Copies], click the [] or [] button or input the number.

The number of copies can be from 1 to 999.

134

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences...] screen.

For the [Copies], click the [] or [] button or input the number.

The number of copies can be from 1 to 999.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

In [Copies] on the application's [Print] screen, click the [] or [] button or input the number.

135

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings


PCL Adobe PS

Setting the Print Direction (Orientation)


This selects Iandscape or portrait direction to print on the paper.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. For the [Orientation], select [Portrait] or [Landscape].

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences...] screen.

For the [Orientation], select [Portrait] or [Landscape].

136

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. For the [Orientation], select [Portrait] or [Landscape].

When the Adobe PS driver is selected, if [Landscape] is selected, you can select [Rotated]. To reverse printing from top/bottom, check the [Rotated] checkbox.

137

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings


PCL Adobe PS

Setting the Print Paper Size (Paper Size)


This sets the size of the paper to print on.
For details on the sizes of paper that can be set in the printer's input trays, refer to the copier user's manual.

The paper sizes that can be selected are as follows. Statement (5.5 x 8.5 inch) Letter (8.5x11inch) Legal (8.5 x 14 inch) Tabloid (11 x 17 inch) A3 (297 x 420 mm) A4 (210 x 297 mm) A5 (148 x 210 mm) B4 (250 x 354mm) B5 (182 x 257 mm) B6 (128 x 182mm) F4 (8 x 13 inch) 8K (267 x 390 mm) 16K (195 x 267 mm)

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. Select [Paper Size].

138

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

Select [Original Size].

Depending on the application being used, the paper size is set automatically by the application and the paper size that is selected here is ignored. For example, with Microsoft Word 98, the paper size selected by [Paper Size] in [Page Setup] from the [File] menu is set for the paper size.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. Select [Paper size].

139

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings


PCL Adobe PS

Selecting the Type of Paper (Media Type/Paper Type)


This selects the type of media to print. The types of paper you can select are as follows. Plain paper: Regular copy paper OHP (Transparency): Overhead projector film OHP Interleave (Blank): White paper inserted between overhead projector film OHP Interleave (Print): Prints the same choices on the OHP interleaf paper as on the film.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Media Type], select the media type.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults...] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences...] screen.

140

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings

In [Paper Type], select the paper type.

The collate function cannot be used at the same time as a [Paper Type] selection of [OHP (Transparency)], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (Printed)].

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Paper type], select the paper size.

The collate function cannot be used at the same time as a [Paper Type] selection of [OHP (Transparency)], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (Printed)].

141

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings


PCL Adobe PS

Printing Enlarged/Reduced (Scaling)


If the document size and the paper size are different, the enlargement/reduction ratio for automatically matching the paper size is displayed and can be selected.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Options] tab. In [Scaling], click the [] or [] button or input the number.

The magnification ratio can be set from 10% to 400 %.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

142

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings

Select the [Original Size] and [Output Size].

In [Zoom], click the [] or [] button or input the number.


The magnification ratio can be set from 25% to 400 %. Zooming is performed in ratio to the size converted to output size.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Graphics] tab. In [Scaling], click the [] or [] button or input the number.

The magnification ratio can be set from 10% to 400 %.

When the paper size is set to A3 in Windows 95/98/Me, the magnification ratio can be set from 25% to 400 %.

143

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings


PCL Adobe PS

Selecting the Input Tray (Paper Source)


This selects the input tray containing the paper to print on. The types of input trays that can be selected are as follows. Auto Select: The tray is selected automatically to match the paper size. Tray 1-5: Input trays (The number of trays depends on the options installed on the copier.) Bypass Tray

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Paper Source], select the tray.

When an input tray other than [Auto] is selected, the selected tray is displayed blue on the copier diagram.

144

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

In [Paper Source], select the tray.

When an input tray other than [Auto] is selected, the selected tray is displayed blue on the copier diagram.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Paper Source], select the tray.

145

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings


PCL Adobe PS

Selecting the Output Tray (Output Bin)


This selects the tray which to output printed material. This can be selected when the optional output unit is installed on the copier. The types of output trays that can be selected are as follows. Default: The printers (copiers) normal output tray. Tray 1-4: Trays on the optional output unit

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Output Tray], select the tray.

146

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

In [Output Tray], select the tray.

When an output tray is selected, the selected tray is displayed blue on the copier diagram.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Output bin], select the tray.

147

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-3. Basic Print Settings


Adobe PS

Setting the Margin (Margins)


This sets the width for the margin for printing. When the PostScript option is installed, the settings can be made on Windows 95/98/Me.

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.

The margins can be set from the applications [Print] screen.

Click the [Margins...] button.

The [Margins] screen is displayed.

Select the margins [Units].

The margin widths are set. Click the [] or [] button or input the number.
The minimum margin that can be set is (0.18 inch). The maximum margin that can be set depends on the size of the paper.

Click the [OK] button.

148

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Duplex (

Page 153)

This prints consecutive pages on the front and rear. [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short edge] can be selected.

Flip on long edge

Flip on short edge

PCL

Adobe PS

Pages per sheet /Layout (

Page 155)

This prints multiple pages of consecutive data combined on one side of one sheet of paper. The print image is automatically reduced to match the selected paper size. 2-16 pages of data can be combined on one print page.

149

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Combination (

Page 158)

For the PCL driver, if the [Orientation] is set to [Landscape], [Top binding] is set.

PCL

Adobe PS

Fold/Stitch (

Page 161)

Processes a sheet for fold & stitch, then delivers it.

PCL

Adobe PS

Collate/Sort (

Page 164)

This prints one entire set of multi-page data at one time.

150

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Offset (

Page 166)

When printing multiple copies, this shifts the position for each set.

PCL

Adobe PS

Stapling (
This staples.

Page 169)

PCL

Adobe PS

Punch/Punch Holes (
Punch holes in the document.

Page 173)

PCL

Adobe PS

Front Cover/Back Cover (

Page 177)

This prints attaching a front cover or back cover.

151

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Sheet Insertion (

Page 180)

This inserts the sheet to be inserted and prints it out.

152

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Printing on Both the Front and Rear of the Paper (Duplex)


This prints consecutive pages on the front and rear. [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short edge] can be selected.

Flip on long edge

Flip on short edge

Flip on long edge The pages are flipped on their long edges. The front and rear have the same top. Flip on short edge The pages are flipped on their short edges. The front and rear have tops at opposite ends.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Duplex], select [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short edge].

153

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen. Duplex printing and booklet printing cannot be set simultaneously.

Check the [Duplex] checkbox.

In [Duplex], select [Long Edge] or [Short Edge].

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Duplex], select [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short edge].

154

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (Pages per Sheet/Layout)


This prints multiple pages of consecutive data combined on one side of one sheet of paper. The print image is automatically reduced to match the selected paper size. Page combination 2-16 pages of data can be combined on one print page.

2 up

4 up

6 up

9 up

16 up

When printing, the print image is automatically reduced to match the selected paper size.

155

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the PCL drier (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Options] tab. In [Pages per sheet], select the combination type.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

Check the [N-up] checkbox.

3 4 5

In [N-up], select the combination type. From [Order] the sheet layout order can be selected from left to right or from right to left. From [Border] the type of line for the frame can be selected.
When 4up or more is selected for the N-up, select the [Order] from the four types.

156

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Graphics] tab. In [Layout], select the combination type.

When printing frames on combined pages, check the [Print page border] checkbox.

157

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Folding Paper in Two to Make Booklets (Combination)


This prints swapping the order of the pages so that the output paper can be compiled and folded in two to make a booklet.

Booklet The paper is bound on the left side. This is selected when the pages proceed from left to right.

Booklet-Right (can be selected only when the Adobe PS driver is used.) The paper is bound on the right side. This is selected when the pages proceed from right to left.

158

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

When using the PCL driver, if the [Orientation] is set to [Landscape], [Top binding] is set. Booklet/special mode cannot be selected when any of the settings below are in effect: When the [Paper Size] is other than [Legal (8.5 x 14 inch)], [Tabloid (11 x 17 inch)], [A3], [B4], [B6], [F4], [8K], and [16K]. When the [Media type] is [OHP (Transparency)], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (Print)] When [Stapling], [Duplex],or [Punch] is set When [Front cover/Back cover] is set When [Sort] is not set

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Combination], select [Booklet] or [Booklet-Right].

159

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Cover/Booklet] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

Check the [Booklet] checkbox.

In [Booklet], select [Left Binding] or [Right Binding].

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Device Options] tab. In [Printer features], select [Combination].

In [Change setting for], select [Booklet] or [Booklet-Right].

160

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Fold&Stitch
Fold or bind a sheet in the center and output. Stitch Staple at two sections in the center of sheet to be output, then fold it into two and output. Fold The sheet to be output is folded at the center and output.

If the Fold & Stitch option is used in the "Booklet" mode, a sheet that is bound at the center and folded into two is output. (With the "Booklet" mode only, sheets are not folded into two and output.)

Fold & Stitch cannot be used when the following settings are selected. Common for PCL and Adobe PS When "B6", "F4" or "16K" is selected for the [Paper Size]. If "Staple," "Offset," or "Punch" is selected. When "Collate" is not selected ("Sort" is not selected) PCL only When [Fold] or [Fold&Print] is selected as the "Output Method."

161

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Combination], select [Fold only] or [Fold & Stitch].

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printing Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults...] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences...] screen.

2 3

Check the [Features] checkbox. In [Fold/Stitch], select [Fold & Stitch] or [Fold Only].

162

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Paper type], select [Saddle Tray].

3 4

Select the [Device Options] tab. In [Printer features], select [Fold, Stitch].

In [Change setting for], select [Fold only] or [Fold, Stitch].

163

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Printing One Copy at a Time of All Pages (Collate/Sort)


This prints one entire set of multi-page data at one time.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. Check the [Collate] checkbox.

164

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

Check the [Collate] checkbox.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Device Options] tab. In [Printer features], select [Collate].

In [Change setting for] select [Sort].

165

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Outputting Sorted into Separate Sets of Copies (Offset)


When printing multiple copies, this shifts the output position for each set. This is handy when outputting multiple copies to a single output tray.

When the copier optional paper output unit is installed, the paper is output with its position shifted for each set. When the paper output unit is not installed, the paper is output with the direction changed for each set.

When there is a paper output unit

When there is no paper output unit

166

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Offset], select [On].

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

Check the [Offset] checkbox.

167

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Device Options] tab. In [Printer features], select [Job Offset].

In [Change setting for], select [On].

168

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Stapling (Staple)
Portrait and Landscape Stapling with the papers joined lengthwise is called [Portrait] and stapling with the papers joined widthwise is called [Landscape]. Number of staples and their locations The pages are bound on either the left or right side of the paper. For stapling, you can select one- or two-point stapling.
For details on the stapling positions, refer to the copier user's manual.

169

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


The types of stapling that can be selected are as follows:
Portrait Landscape

Single Left

Single Left

Single Right

Single Right

Double Left

Double Left

Double Top

Double Top

Double Right

Double Right

Stapling cannot be selected when any of the following settings are in effect: When the [Paper Size] is [B6] When the [Media Type] is [OHP (Transparency], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (print)] When [Combination] is set When [Sort] is not set

170

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Staple], select the number and location of the staples.

To set either portrait or landscape, change the [Orientation] setting.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

Check the [Staple] checkbox.

Select the number and location of the staples.


To set either portrait or landscape, change the [Orientation] setting.

171

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Device Options] tab. In [Printer features], select [Stapling].

In [Change setting for], select the number and location of the staples.

172

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Punch/Punch Holes
This punches holes in the document. Portrait and Landscape Punching the papers joined lengthwise is called [Portrait] and punching the papers joined widthwise is called [Landscape]. Left This punches holes on the left side of the document. Used to fasten the page from the left side.

Left (Portrait)

Left (Landscape)

Right This punches holes on the right side of the document. Used to fasten the page from the right side.

Right (Portrait)

Right (Landscape)

Top This punches holes on the top side of the document. Used to fasten the page from the top.

Top (Portrait)

Top (Landscape)

Punch count settings are different every destination. 2 Holes [2/3 Hole Type] (for U.S. and Canada market area only) 3 Holes [2/3 Hole Type] (for U.S. and Canada market area only) 4 Holes [4 Hole Type]

173

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Punch holes cannot be selected when any of the following settings are in effect: When the [Paper Size] is [A5], [B6], [Tabloid], or [Statement] When the [Media Type] is not [Plain paper] When [Combination] is set Depending on the setting for [Paper Size], [Orientation], [Pages per sheet], or [Staple], some part of the settings can be limited.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Punch], select the number and location of the punch.

In [Punch Holes], select the number of the punch holes.

174

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

Check the [Punch] checkbox.

In [Position], select the location of the punch.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Device Options] tab. In [Printer features], select [Punch].

In [Change setting for], select the location of the punch.

175

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

In [Printer features], select [Punch Holes].

In [Change setting for], select the number of the punch holes.

176

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL Adobe PS

Attaching a Front Cover/Back Cover (Front Cover/Back Cover)


This prints attaching a front cover or back cover. Front cover This prints a front cover. For the front cover, select either [Blank] or [Printed]. For [Blank], one sheet of white paper is added. For [Printed], the first page of the data is printed on the front cover.

When the front cover is set to [Blank]

When the front cover is set to [Printed]

Back cover This prints attaching a back cover. For the back cover, select either [Blank] or [Printed]. For [Blank], one sheet of white paper is added. For [Printed], the last page of the data is printed on the back cover.

When the back cover is set to [Blank]

When the back cover is set to [Printed]

Input tray Select the tray in which the paper for the front cover/back cover is. Select a tray with paper the same size as the main text.

Front cover/back cover cannot be set when any of the following settings are in effect: When the [Paper Size] is [B6], [Legal], or [Statement] When a [Media Type] of [OHP (Transparency)], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (Print)] is selected When [Combination] is set When [Collate/Sort] is not set

177

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Cover] tab. Check the [Front Cover] or [Back Cover] checkbox.

3 4

For the front cover/back cover, select either [Blank] or [Printed]. Select the [Tray] containing the paper to use as the front cover/back cover.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Cover/Booklet] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

Check the [Front Cover] or [Back Cover] checkbox.

178

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

3 4

For the front cover/back cover, select either [Blank] or [Printed]. Select the [Tray] containing the paper to use as the front cover/back cover.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Device Options] tab. In [Printer features], select [Front Cover] and/or [Back Cover].

3 4 5

In [Change setting for], select [Printed] or [Blank]. In [Printer features], select [Front/Back Cover Tray]. In [Change setting for], select the input tray in which the paper for the front cover/back cover is set.

179

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages


PCL

Attaching a Sheet Insertion (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)


During printing, a specified page can be printed out on a sheet from a separate paper tray. Also, singleside printing and dual-side printing can be specified in the middle of printing out a document. Sheet Insertion A specified page can be printed on a sheet from a separate paper tray. Also, single-side printing and dual-side printing can be specified in the middle of printing out a document. List Settings of [Page Number], [Page Source], [Print Type], [Duplex Mode] for sheet insertion can be registered as the "List".

In the PCL driver [Properties] screen, select [Cover/Insertion] tag.


For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults...] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences...] screen

Check the checkbox for [Sheet Insertion].

Click the [] button at the right side of the List Name box to display list names and select a list name to be used from the list. In the list box, the settings for the selected list name are displayed.
Ten types of list names [List 1] to [List 10] are registered and the lists are limited to 10 types.

To change the [List Name], click the [Change Name...] button. If you plan to leave the list as is, skip to step 7.

180

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Change the [List Name].


Up to 16 characters can be input in the [List Name] field.

6 7

Click the [OK] button. The display returns to the [Cover/Insertion] tab. Click the [Add...] button.

Input the page numbers for the inserted sheets in the [Page Number] box.
Input the page number in half-width numbers between 1 and 999. Multiple page numbers can be input. Example:To specify pages 2, 4 and 6: [2,4,6] To specify pages 6 to 10 [6-10]

To switch between single-side and dual-side printing in the middle of printing a document, check the [Simplex/Duplex selection for each page] checkbox.

When the [Simplex/Duplex selection for each page] checkbox is checked, the front and back covers cannot be used.

181

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

10

Click the [] button at the right side of the [Print Type] box to display sheet types and select a sheet type for the inserted sheets from the list of sheet types being displayed.

If the [Simplex/Duplex selection for each page] checkbox in step 9 is turned OFF, [Printed] is displayed for [Printed(Simplex)] and [Printed(Duplex)].

11

Click the [] button at the right side of the [Duplex Mode] box and select [Long Edge] or [Short Edge] from the list being displayed.

If a setting other than [Printed(Duplex)] is selected in step 10, setting for [Duplex Mode] cannot be performed.

182

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

12

Click the [] button at the right side of the list box for [Paper Source], then select a tray for feeding the insertion sheets from the list.

13

Click the [OK] button. Returns to the display of the [Front Cover/Insertion Sheet] tab. The selected tray is displayed in the list box. When selecting a different print type or different paper tray for the inserted sheets, repeat steps 7 to 13.
Up to 256 settings can be added to a list.

14

15 16

Check the settings in the list. Click the [OK] button

183

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Adding/Changing the Inserted Sheet Lists

In the [Properties] screen for the PCL driver, select [Cover/Insertion] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults...] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences...] screen.

Check the [Sheet Insertion] checkbox.

Click the [] button at the right side of the List Name box and select a list name to be used from the list being displayed. The settings for the selected list name are displayed in the list box.
Ten types of list names [List 1] to [List 10] are registered and the lists are limited to 10 types.

To change the [List Name], click the [Change Name...] button.

Change the setting.


Up to 16 characters can be input in the [List Name] box.

Click the [OK] button.

184

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

To change the settings appearing in the list box, select the setting to be changed, then click the [Edit] button.

Change the settings.


For details on changing settings, refer to steps 7 to 13 in [Attaching a Sheet Insertion].

9 10 11

Click the [OK] button Returns to the display of the [Cover/Insertion] tab. Check the contents of the list. Click the [OK] button.

Deleting a List of Insertion Sheets

In the [Properties] screen of the PCL driver, select the [Cover/Insertion] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults...] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences...] screen.

Check the [Sheet Insertion] checkbox.

185

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-4. Printing Multiple Pages

3 4 5

Select an item to be deleted and click the [Delete] button. Check the contents of the list. If there are other items to be deleted, repeat the procedure in step 3. Click the [OK] button.

186

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-5. Making Image Settings


This makes settings concerning the print quality for photographs and other images. Image settings are made with the PCL driver [Graphics] tab.

<Windows 95/98/Me>

<Windows NT4.0/2000/XP>

PCL

Halftoning
This is expressed by changing the density of the black and white dots making up the image. Select dither for printing at high speed. The choices that can be selected are as follows. Solid Black and White: The image is expressed with 2 tones, black and white. Patterned Grays: Diffused Grays: The image is expressed by half tone. Select error dispersal to print with high quality emphasizing images.

Brightness (Windows 95/98/Me)


By clicking the [<], [>] or entering numbers, set brightness of the image.

Contrast (Windows 95/98/Me)


By clicking the [<], [>] or entering numbers, set contrast of the image.

Print Density (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)


Printing darkness can be selected in 5 steps of shading.

187

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-5. Making Image Settings

Print as Black (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)


When printing CAD drawings, etc., which contain color characters or line drawings, this option prevents the color elements from printing out in lighter shades of color. The following options can be selected : Text and Chart Allows for printing characters and color elements contained in graphics clearly in black and white. All Allows for printing all image data, including photos, etc., clearly in black and white.
PCL Adobe PS

Smoothing
This smoothes curved sections in printed characters and images to make jaggedness (the rough sections seen at the edges of figures and text) stand out less. The choices that can be selected are as follows. Off Does not smooth. Type 1 Smoothes diagonal lines in general characters and figures. Type 2 Smoothes curved sections of general characters. Type 3 Smoothes the more detailed sections, for example curved line sections of decorative and fine characters.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

With the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Smoothing], select the type.

188

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-5. Making Image Settings

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Graphics] tab.
For the Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults...] screen. For the Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences...] screen.

In [Smoothing], select the type.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Device Options] tab. In [Printer features], select [Smoothing].

In [Change setting for], select Type.

189

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-5. Making Image Settings


PCL Adobe PS

Toner Save
This controls the print density and conserves the toner. To conserve toner, check the checkbox.

Toner save and Smoothing function cannot be used at same time.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

With the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. In [Toner Save], select [On].

190

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-5. Making Image Settings

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printer Preferences...], select the [Graphics] tab.
For the Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults...] screen. For the Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences...] screen.

Check the [Toner Saver] checkbox.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Device Options] tab. In [Printer features], select [Toner Save].

In [Change setting for], select [On].

191

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-5. Making Image Settings


Adobe PS

Setting the Resolution (Resolution)


This sets the resolution for printing. This setting is made with the Adobe PS driver [Graphics] tab.

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Graphics] tab. In [Resolution] select the resolution for printing.

The resolution can only be [600 dpi] and cannot be changed.

192

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-5. Making Image Settings


PCL Adobe PS

Printing with Black and White Reversed (Print as a Negative Image)


This prints with the black and white sections of the document reversed like negative film.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

With the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Graphics] tab. Check the [Negative] checkbox.

Black and white in the printing are reversed.

193

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-5. Making Image Settings

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Graphics] tab. Check the [Print as a negative image] checkbox.

Black and white in the printing are reversed.

194

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-5. Making Image Settings


Adobe PS

Printing with Left/Right Reversed (Print as a Mirror Image)


This prints with the left/right reversed as if in a mirror.

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Graphics] tab. Check the [Print as a mirror image] checkbox.

The left and right in the printing are reversed.

195

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-6. Setting the Font


This allows for converting TrueType fonts used by Windows into printer fonts incorporated in the printer, and for setting PostScript fonts.

Fonts
Fonts which are preinstalled in the printer are called Printer Fonts. When data is created using Windows, TrueType fonts are mainly used. However, when the data is printed, by converting the TrueType fonts in which the data was created into printer fonts, the volume of printer data can be reduced and high-speed printing can be realized. Also, when printer fonts are used, printing times are shortened, however, the appearance of the data when it is printed out may differ from how it looks on the screen.
PCL

TrueType Font Settings (Windows 95/98/Me)


This sets the printing process method of TrueType fonts used in the data. The choices that can be selected are as follows. Outline soft fonts The font is represented as a series of curves and lines of a character. However, printing will be very high quality. Bitmap soft fonts The font is expressed the character by gathering of dots. The font is expressed by a conglomeration of dots. Rasters This converts the print data into the bitmapped image according to the resolution of the printer.

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Options] tab. From [True Type options], select the method of processing.

196

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-6. Setting the Font


Adobe PS

PostScript Font Settings


This makes settings concerning PostScript fonts and output.

Addition of Euro currency symbol


This adds the Euro currency symbol to PostScript fonts.

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Fonts] tab. Check the [Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts] checkbox.

PostScript output format


This selects the format for outputting PostScript files. The choices that can be selected are as follows. PostScript (Optimized for speed)
Select this item for normal printing.

PostScript (Optimize for portability-ADSC)


Selected when processing each page of a document as an independent object.

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)


Selected to make a file into just one page so that it can be pasted into a document for another application and printed.

Archive format
Selected to save PostScript files for later use.

197

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-6. Setting the Font

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [PostScript] tab. In [PostScript output format], select the output format.

PostScript header
This selects whether or not to send header information to the printer for each printing The choices that can be selected are as follows. Download header with each print job.
Select this item for normal printing.

Assume header is downloaded and retained.


This is selected when there is no need to send the header information repeatedly, for example on a local printer. This reduces the print time somewhat.

Send Header Now


Click this button to download the header immediately.

When an [EPS format] or [Archive format] is selected, the PostScript header setting is ignored.

198

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-6. Setting the Font

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [PostScript] tab. In [PostScript header], select the item.

PostScript error information printing


This prints an error message on a separate sheet of paper when a PostScript error occurs during printing.

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [PostScript] tab. Check the [Print PostScript error information] checkbox.

199

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-6. Setting the Font

PostScript timeout values


This sets the usable time and wait time when using the printer. The choices that can be set are as follows. Job timeout
This is the maximum time that can be used to print one set of data. When the set time is exceeded, the printer stops printing and starts preparations for the next set of data.

Wait timeout
This is the time for waiting to receive data from Windows. When the set time is exceeded, the printer starts preparations for the next set of data. The timeout is set for such cases as when the data is not sent due to a computer error.

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [PostScript] tab. In [PostScript timeout values], set the timeout time.

The number of copies can be set to 0-999. To disable timeouts, input [0].

200

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-6. Setting the Font

TrueType Font Settings (Windows NT 4.0)


The TrueType font in which data was created is converted into a printer font.

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Font] tab. Check the [Use Printer Fonts] checkbox.

This enables font selection with the [TrueType Fonts Replacement Table].

3 4 5

Select the TrueType font to be replaced. Select the printer font to which the TrueType font is to be replaced from [Using Printer Fonts]. Click [Apply]. The selected printer font is registered in the [TrueType Fonts Replacement Table].

PDL Option
The PDL can be changed. When the PDL is changed, the printer fonts which can be used also change. The following PDL can be used: PCL- XL PCL- 5E

201

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-6. Setting the Font

TrueType Font Settings (Windows 2000/XP)


The TrueType font in which data was created is converted into a printer font.

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Fonts] tab. Check the [Use Printer Fonts] checkbox.

This enables font selection with the [TrueType Fonts Replacement Table]. Taken from an illustration of Windows 2000.

3 4 5

Select the TrueType font to be replaced. Select the printer font to which the TrueType font is to be replaced from [Using Printer Fonts]. Click [Apply]. The selected printer font is registered in the [TrueType Fonts replacement Table].

PDL Option
The PDL can be changed. When the PDL is changed, the printer fonts which can be used also change. The following PDL can be used: PCL- XL PCL- 5E

202

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing


PCL

Overlay (

Page 204)

This prints overlaying the document with separate form data.

Form data

Prepared data

PCL

Adobe PS

Watermark (

Page 207)

This prints [CONFIDENTIAL] or another preset text as a watermark.

PCL

Password Print (

Page 211)

This prints after a registered User ID and password are input. This is used for printing confidential data.

User ID Password

203

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing


PCL

Printing Overlaying Another Document (Overlay)


This prints overlaying the document with separate form data.

Form data

Prepared data

1 2 3

Prepare the form data with an application. From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Check that the [Name] is [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx].

4 5

Click the [Properties] button. The [Properties] screen is displayed. Click the [Overlay] tab.

204

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing

Click the [Select Bitmap] button.

The [Open overlay file] screen is displayed.

Select the document to print with the form data.

Click the [OK] button. The display returns to the [Properties] screen.
The file name extension of [.bmp] is given.

Check that the selected file name is displayed.

205

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing

10 11 12

To shade the image, select the color of the shade from [Color] in [Shade]. Click the [ ], [ ] button in [Darkness], then adjust the darkness of the shade.

To change the size of the image, either click the [], [] button with [User defined] in [Size] selected, or key in the numbers.
For the automatic setting, select [Automatically].

13

To change the position of the image, either click the [], [] button with [User defined] in [Position] selected, or key in the numbers.

14 15

Click the [OK] button. The display returns to the [Print] screen. Click the [OK] button. The form data is printed overlaid on the document.

206

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing


PCL Adobe PS

Printing Watermarks (Watermark)


This prints preset text as a watermark. This setting is made in [Watermark] tab.

You can change the character choices, size, and position with the edit functions.

Setting with PCL driver

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Watermarks] tab. In [Text] of [Watermarks], select the characters from the list for printing. Check the [Use watermark] checkbox.

The choices that can be selected are as follows. CONFIDENTIAL COPY DRAFT FILE COPY FINAL PROOF TOP SECRET

You can also input characters into [Text].

207

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing

In [Page] of [Watermarks], select the page for printing the watermark. The choices that can be selected are as follows. All but first page All pages First page only No watermark To print a watermark over an image, select [Top] in [Watermarks]. To print a watermark behind an image, select [Bottom].

To print several watermarks on a single page, either click the [], [] button with [Count] in [Watermark] or key in the numbers. You can adjust the interval between watermarks by clicking the [], [] button on [Separation].

5 6

In [Font], set the font. This sets the font name, style, font size, color, and character darkness. Select [User defined] in [Position], and set the character position and angle.

If you select [Move] from [Adjustment], you can drag a character and move it. If you select [Rotate], you can drag a character and rotate it. To create a watermark, click the [NEW] button. To delete a watermark, click the [Delete] button.

208

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing

Setting with Adobe PS driver

1 2

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Watermarks] tab. In [Select a watermark] select the characters for printing.

The choices that can be selected are as follows. CONFIDENTIAL COPY DRAFT ORIGINAL URGENT

Edit, New, Delete (Adobe PS)


The choices and size of the characters in the watermark and the position they are printed at can be changed. It is also possible to prepare new watermarks and delete watermarks that are no longer needed. When you click the [Edit] button, the [Edit watermark] screen is displayed.

The settings that can be changed are as follows. Watermark text


This sets the Watermark Text, Font, Size, Style.

Angle
This sets the watermark angle.

209

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing


Position
This sets what position on the paper the watermark is printed at. To print in the center, select [Automatically center]. To print at any other position, select [Position relative to center], then input the coordinates.

Color
Not Available.

Preparing a new watermark


On the [Watermarks] tab, click the [New] button. For the setting method, refer to the choices explained previously.

Deleting a watermark
Select the watermark to delete in [Watermarks], then click the [Delete] button. Check the choices, then click the [OK] button.

210

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing


PCL

Printing with a Password (Password Print)


This prints after a registered User ID and Password are input. This is used for printing confidential data.

User ID Password

Some application software saves the choices of the printer driver settings. For files shared on a network and files that may be printed by someone else, when printing with the [Use settings], delete the User ID and Password before saving.

Setting a User ID and Password


Register the output User ID and Password.

Windows 95/98/Me

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. Check the [Password Print] checkbox.

The [Password Print] screen is displayed.

211

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing

Input the User ID to be registered.

Input a User ID of up to 8 digits.

Input the password.


Input a password up to 8 characters.

Click the [OK] button. The User ID and password are set, and password print is possible.
When [Printer EKC/ECM function] is set on the copier, the User ID registered on the [Password Print Settings] screen automatically becomes the printer EKC/ECM User ID. For details on Printer EKC/ECM, refer to [Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)] ( Page 295).

Printing from an application.

Windows NT4.0/2000/XP

From the PCL driver [Printing Preferences], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

In [Printer Destination] select the [Password Print].

212

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing

Input the User ID to be registered.

Input a User ID of up to 8 digits.

Input the Password.


Input a Password up to 8 characters.

Click the [OK] button. The User ID and password are set, and password print is possible.
When [Printer EKC/ECM function] is set on the copier, the User ID registered on the [Password Print Settings] screen automatically becomes the printer EKC/ECM User ID. For details on Printer EKC/ECM, refer to [Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)] ( Page 295).

Printing from an application.

213

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing

Operating from the control panel


When password print is set, after executing printing from an application, printing is not possible until the User ID and password are input on the printers control panel.

Password print jobs are temporarily stored on the copiers hard disk. If those jobs are not printed out within setting time of [Document Folder] setting of Key Operator mode, they will be deleted automatically. For detail refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

1 2

Printing from an application. Press the (PRINTER) button on the control panel.

The [Printer basic mode] screen is displayed.

Touch the [Password Print] key.

The [Password Print] screen is displayed.

214

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing

Touch the [User ID] key, input the User ID with the number key on the control panel.

If you touch the [DELETE] key, the last character is deleted.

5 6

Touch the [Password] key. The [Data Input] screen is displayed. Input the password with the [0] key to the [9] key, the uppercase key and lowercase key.
For instructions on inputting, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

7 8

Touch the [OK] key. A list of the corresponding print jobs is displayed. Select the print job, then touch the [PRINT] key.

The selected print job is printed. Touch [ALL SELECT] to select all print jobs. Touch [DELETE] to delete print job selected. Touch [BACK] to go back to [Password Print] screen.

215

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing


PCL

Holding the Printed Text in the Document Folder(Hold)


The printed text can be held in the Box created in the copier. It can also be printed out while it is held in the box.

The printed text cannot be held in other than the Box created in the copier.

For instructions on Document Folder, refer to the copier users manual Document Folder.

Windows 95/98/Me

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. Check the [Hold] or [Hold & Print] checkbox.

The [Hold & Print] screen is displayed.

Enter the UserID set for the Document Folder.

216

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing

If no UserID is preset, do not input here.

Input a UserID with numerical figures up to 8 digits.

Input the password preset for the Document Folder.

If no password is preset, do not input here.

Input a password with alphabetical and numerical figures up to 8 digits.

Input the Box No. that you want to hold. If you hold the text in the system box, do not input here.
Input a Box No. with numerical figures up to 9 digits.

6 7

Click the [OK] button. In this step you can hold the text in the box. Printing from an application.

217

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing

Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen. For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

Select [Hold] or [Hold & Print] in the [Printer Destination] item.

The [Hold & Print] screen is displayed.

Input the UserID preset for the Document Folder.

If no UserID is preset, do not input here.

Input a UserID with numerical figures up to 8 digits.

Input the Box No. that you want to hold. If you hold the text in the system box, do not input here.
Input a Box No. with numerical figures up to 9 digits.

218

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-7. Special Printing

Input the preset password in the Document Folder.

If no password is preset, do not input here.

Input a password with alphabetical and numerical figures of 8 characters.

6 7

Click the [OK] button. The printed text can be held in the box. Printing from an application.

219

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer


This makes the settings for the port connecting the computer and the printer and adds drivers. These settings are made with the PCL driver or Adobe PS driver properties.

Windows 95/98/Me

Checking the printer driver version


This checks the version of the printer driver currently being used. Select the [About] tab. The driver name and version can be checked.

220

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer

Adding a printer driver


If you want to use a new printer driver that is not on the [Print using the following driver] list, this adds that printer driver.

1 2

Click the [Details] tab. Click the [New Driver...] button.

The confirmation screen is displayed.

Click the [Yes] button.

The [Select device] screen is displayed. For the rest of the procedure, refer to [Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use] (

page 14).

Timeout settings
This sets the wait time until the printer is in a usable state. The choices that can be set are as follows. Not selected This sets the wait time until the printer can print when print data is transmitted from the computer, When the set time is exceeded, an error message is displayed and the print job is automatically canceled. Transmission retry This sets the wait time until the printer can retry printing when data transmission from the computer fails. When the set time is exceeded, an error message is displayed and the print job is automatically canceled.

221

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer

Port settings
This can be set when [LPT*] is set as the printed connection destination. This makes settings for the LPT port to which the printer is connected. The choices that can be set are as follows. Spool MS-DOS print jobs Spooling print jobs from MS-DOS-based applications Check port state before printing This checks whether the port is connected before printing.

Capture Printer port


This assigns a network printer to a virtual printer port. The choices that can be set are as follows. Device Select the port to which the network printer is connected. Path The printer connection path is input. Reconnect at logon Each time Windows is started, choose whether or not to connect to the printer. To connect, check the checkbox.

End Capture
This ends the setting for the set port.

1 2

Click the [Details] tab. Click the [End Capture...] button.

The [End Capture] screen is displayed.

The port to release is selected.

222

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer

Click the [OK] button.

Port addition/deletion
This adds or deletes a network or local printer. To add a port, click the [Add port] button, then input the network path or port name. To delete a port, click the [Delete port] button, then select the port to delete.

Spool settings
This sets the method for temporarily accumulating (spooling) the print data when it is sent to the printer. The choices that can be set are as follows. Spool print jobs so program finishes printing faster When this item is selected, the data is spooled. In addition, the spool format can be selected. When you select [Start printing after last page is spooled], you can edit other documents and start other applications during printing. When you select [Start printing after first page is spooled], the computer's processing is slightly slower. Select this when there is little free space for spooling on the hard disk. In addition, the spool format can be selected. Print directly to the printer This sends print jobs directly to the printer without spooling. Bi-directional support for this printer This selects whether or not to use the bi-directional communications function when the printer communicates with the computer.

223

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer

Windows NT 4.0
Checking the printer driver version
This checks the version of the printer driver currently being used. With the PCL driver [Properties], select the [About] tab. The driver name and version can be checked.

Adding a printer driver


If you want to use a new printer driver that is not on the [Print using the following driver] list, this adds that printer driver.

1 2

In PCL driver [Properties], click the [General] tab. Click the [New Driver] button.

The confirmation screen is displayed.

224

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer

Click the [Yes] button.

The Select device screen is displayed. For the rest of the procedure, refer to [Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use] (

page 14).

Timeout time setting


This sets the wait time until the printer can retry printing when data transmission from the computer fails. When the set time is exceeded, an error message is displayed and the print job is automatically canceled.

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Ports] tab. Select the port to use, then click the [Configure Port] button.

The [LPT port configuration] screen is displayed.

This inputs the wait time until the computer re-sends print data.

Click the [OK] button.

225

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer

Printer port assignment


This assigns a network printer to a virtual printer port.

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Ports] tab. Check the checkbox for the port to which the network printer is connected.

Click the [OK] button.

Deleting the printer port


This ends the setting for the set port.

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Ports] tab. Uncheck the checkbox for the port to be released.

Click the [OK] button.

226

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer

Port addition/deletion
This adds or deletes a network or local printer. To add a port, on the [Ports] tab, click the [Add port] button, then click the [New port] button and input the port name. To delete a port, select the port to delete in [Ports] tab, and click the [Delete port] button.

Spool settings
This sets the method for temporarily accumulating (spooling) the print data when it is sent to the printer. This setting is made in [Scheduling] tab.

Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster. When this item is selected, the data is spooled. In addition, the spool format can be selected. When you select [Start printing after last page is spooled], you can edit other documents and start other applications even during printing. When [Start printing immediately] is selected, the spooled data is sent immediately to the computer. Print directly to the printer This sends print jobs directly to the printer without spooling.

227

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer

Windows 2000/XP
Checking the printer driver version
This checks the version of the printer driver currently being used.

On the PCL driver [Properties], click the [About] tab. The driver name and version can be checked.

Adding a printer driver


If you want to use a new printer driver that is not on the [Print using the following driver] list, this adds that printer driver.

1 2

On the PCL driver [Properties], click the [Advanced] tab. Click the [New Driver...] button.

The [Add Printer Driver Wizard] screen is displayed. For the rest of the procedure, refer to [Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use] (

Page 49).

228

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer

Timeout time setting


This sets the wait time until the printer can retry printing when data transmission from the computer fails. When the set time is exceeded, an error message is displayed and the print job is automatically canceled.

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Ports] tab. Select the port to use, then click the [Configure Port] button.

The [Configure LPT Port] screen is displayed.

This inputs the wait time until the computer re-sends print data.

Click the [OK] button.

229

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer

Printer port assignment


This assigns a network printer to a virtual printer port.

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Ports] tab. Check the checkbox for the port to which the network printer is connected.

Click the [OK] button.

Deleting the printer port


This ends the setting for the set port.

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Ports] tab. Uncheck the checkbox for the port to be released.

Click the [OK] button.

230

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

3-8. Setting the Connection between the Computer and Printer

Port addition/deletion
This adds or deletes a network or local printer. To add a port, on the [Ports] tab, click the [Add port] button, then click the [New port] button and input the port name. To delete a port, select the port to delete in [Ports] tab, and click the [Delete port] button.

Spool settings
This sets the method for temporarily accumulating (spooling) the print data when it is sent to the printer. This setting is made in [Advanced] tab.

Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster. When this item is selected, the data is spooled. In addition, the spool format can be selected. When you select [Start printing after last page is spooled], you can edit other documents and start other applications even during printing. When [Start printing immediately] is selected, the spooled data is sent immediately to the computer. Print directly to the printer This sends print jobs directly to the printer without spooling.

231

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing from Windows

II Printer

Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

You can select the printing method and set functions for printing from applications. This chapter explains the printer functions and setting methods for printing with a Macintosh.

4-1. Setting Printer Functions .................................................................233 4-2. Function List......................................................................................234 4-3. Basic Print Settings ..........................................................................236 4-4. Printing Multiple Pages ....................................................................255 4-5. Special Printing .................................................................................284 4-6. Making PostScript Settings (File Save)...........................................293

232

4-1. Setting Printer Functions


These are set from the screen displayed when a [Print] command is executed from an application. These settings only remain in effect while the application is being used. When the application ends, the settings are deleted. There are the following two methods for displaying the settings screen.

Setting from the [Print] screen


Open data with the application, then from the [File] menu item, select [Print].

The contents of the screen depend on the application.

Setting from the [Page (paper) Setup] screen


Open data with the application, then from the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].

The contents of the screen depend on the application. For some applications, from the [File] menu item, select [Paper settings] - [Options].

233

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-2. Function List


This list contains a summary of the main settings related to printing.

The display of listed items and setting values may vary according to whether options are present (and their settings). The function list is created using the Adobe Acrobat software for explanation. According to your using application software, the function list might not be displayed or a changed list might appear. For details on functions not covered here, refer to your Macintosh guide.

Function Number of copies Direction Media size Manual feed media type Magnification ratio Input method Reverse order printing Output tray Margins Duplex printing Page layout Special mode Collate Offset Staple Punch/Punch Holes Fold&Stich Front cover/Back cover Printing with top/bottom or left/right reversed Black/white reversed printing Watermarks Smoothing Toner save

Summary Basic print settings Specifies the number of copies to print. Selects landscape or portrait direction to print on the paper. Sets the size of the paper to print on. Sets the type of the media for printing. Prints enlarged/reduced. Selects the input tray containing the paper to print on. Prints from the last page to the first. Selects the tray which to output printed paper. Sets the width for the margin (the section not printed at all) for printing Printing multiple pages Prints consecutive pages on the front and rear. Prints multiple pages of consecutive data combined on one side of one sheet of paper. The print image is automatically enlarged/reduced to match the size of the print paper. Prints swapping the order of the pages so that the output paper can be compiled and folded in two to make a booklet. Prints one copy at a time of all the pages. When printing multiple copies, this shifts the output position for each set. Staples. Punches holes in the document. Folds and stitches a sheet at the center, then outputs it. Prints attaching a front cover or back cover. Special printing Prints with the top/bottom or left/right reversed. (Mirror image printing)

Reference Page 236 Page 238 Page 240 Page 244 Page 246 Page 248 Page 250 Page 251 Page 253 Page 258 Page 260

Page 264 Page 267 Page 269 Page 271 Page 275 Page 278 Page 281

Page 284

Prints with black and white reversed. (Negative image printing) Prints preset text as a watermark. Smoothes curved sections so that jaggedness stands out less. Controls the print density and conserves the toner.

Page 285 Page 286 Page 289 Page 291

234

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-2. Function List


Function Format PostScript level Format Font data Summary Making PostScript settings (file save) Sets the data format for writing to files. Sets the PostScript level compatibility. Selects either ASCII or binary. Sets the type of font data embedded in files. Page 293 Page 294 Page 294 Page 294 Reference

235

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings


Setting the Number of Copies to Print (Copies)
This specifies the number of copies to print.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [General].

In [Copies], input the number of copies to print.

The number of copies can be set to 1 to 999.

236

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Copies & Pages].

In [Copies], input the number of copies to print.

237

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Setting the Print Direction (Direction)


This selects landscape or portrait direction to print on the paper.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].


For some applications, from the [File] menu item, select [Paper settings] - [Options].

Select [Page Attributes].

In [Orientation], select the paper direction.

238

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup]. Select [Page Attributes].

In [Orientation], select the paper direction.

239

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Setting the Print Paper Size (Paper)


This sets the size of the paper to print on. The paper sizes that can be selected are as follows. Statement (5.5 x 8.5 inch) Letter (8.5 x 11 inch) Legal (8.5 x 14 inch) Tabloid (11 x 17 inch) A3 (297 x 420 mm) A4 (210 x 297 mm) A5 (148 x 210 mm) B4 (257 x 364 mm) B5 (182 x 257 mm) B6 (128 x 182 mm) F4 (8 x 13 inch) 8K (266 x 387 mm) 16K (193 x 266 mm) Custom

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup]. Select [Page Attributes].

In [Paper], select the paper size.

For details on the sizes of paper that can be set in the printer's input trays, refer to the copier users manual.

240

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup]. Select [Page Attributes].

In [Paper Size], select the paper size.

241

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Setting Any Paper Size


To set a non-standard paper size, select [Custom], then input the paper width and height with the following procedure.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup]. Select [Custom Page Default].

In [Units], select the length unit, then input the height and width of the paper size.

Click the [OK] button.

242

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup]. Select [Custom Paper Size].

Click [New] button and then input the height and width of the paper size.

243

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Selecting the Type of Paper (Media Type)


This selects the type of media to print. The types of paper you can select are as follows. Plain paper: Regular copy paper OHP (Transparency): Overhead projector film OHP Interleave (Blank): White paper inserted between overhead projector film OHP Interleave (Print): Prints the same contents on the OHP interleaf paper as on the transparency.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Media Type], select the paper type.

The collate function cannot be set at the same time as a [Media type] selection of [OHP], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (Print)].

244

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Setup].

In [Media Type], select the paper type.

245

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Printing Enlarged/Reduced (Magnification Ratio)


This specifies the magnification ratio for printing.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup]. Select [Page Attributes].

Input the [Scale].

The magnification ratio can be from 25% to 400 %.

246

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup]. Select [Page Attributes].

Input the [Scale].

The magnification ratio can be from 25% to 400 %.

247

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Selecting the Input Tray (Paper Source)


This selects the input tray containing the paper to print on.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [General].

In [Paper Source], select the input tray containing the paper to print on.

The types of input trays that can be selected are as follows. Auto select: The tray is selected automatically to match the paper size. Tray 1 to 5: Input trays (The number of trays depends on the options installed on the copier.) Manual Feed: Bypass tray

248

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Paper Feed].

Select the input tray.

The types of input trays that can be selected are as follows. Auto select: The tray is selected automatically to match the paper size. Tray 1 to 5: Input trays (The number of trays depends on the options installed on the copier.) Manual Feed: Bypass tray

249

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Selecting the Print Order (Reverse Print Order)


This specifies the order in which pages are printed.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [General].

Check the [Reverse Order] checkbox.

Not checked: The pages are printed in order from first page number to last. When the printing ends, the sheets are stacked in reverse order of their page numbers. Checked: The pages are printed in order from last page number to first. When the printing ends, the sheets are stacked in order of their page numbers.

250

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Selecting the Output Tray (Output Bin)


This selects the tray which to output printed paper. This can be selected when the optional output unit is installed on the copier.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Printer Specific Options].

The tray is selected in [Output Bin]. The types of output trays that can be selected are as follows. Default: The printers (copier) normal output tray. Trays 1 to 4: Trays on the optional output unit.

251

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Finishing].

The tray is selected in [Output Bin].

252

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Setting the Margin (Margins)


This sets the width for the margin for printing.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].


For some applications, from the [File] menu item, select [Paper settings] - [Options].

Select [Custom Page Default].

In [Margins], input the widths of the top, bottom, left, and right margins.

The minimum margin that can be set is 4.2 mm (0.17 inch). The maximum margin that can be set depends on the size of the paper.

253

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-3. Basic Print Settings

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup]. Select [Custom Page Size].

Click [New] button and then input the widths for the Top, Bottom, Left and Right margins.

The minimum margin that can be set is 4.2 mm (0.17 inch). The maximum margin that can be set depends on the size of the paper.

254

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages


Duplex printing (
Page 258)

This prints consecutive pages on the front and rear. [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short edge] can be selected.

Flip on long edge

Flip on short edge

Document pages/print pages/layout direction (

Page 260)

This prints multiple pages of consecutive data combined on one side of one sheet of paper. When the size of the document set by the application is larger than the print paper size, one page of the document is printed laid out over multiple sheets of paper. The print image is automatically enlarged/reduced to match the size of the print paper. From 2 to 16 pages of data can be combined on 1 page and 1 page can be divided into 4 (2x2) to 36 (6x6) units. Printing multiple document pages on one sheet paper

Printing one document page on multiple sheets of paper

255

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Special mode (

Page 264)

This swaps the order of the pages so that the output paper can be compiled and folded in two to make a booklet. [Left binding] or [Right binding] can be selected.

Collating (

Page 267)

This prints one entire set of multi-page data at one time.

Offset (

Page 269)

When printing multiple copies, this shifts the position for each set.

256

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Stapling (
This staples.

Page 271)

Punch/Punch Holes (
This punches holes in the document.

Page 275)

Front cover/Back cover (

Page 281)

This prints attaching a front cover or back cover.

257

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Printing on Both the Front and Rear of the Paper (Duplex Printing)
This prints consecutive pages on the front and rear. [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short edge] can be selected.

Flip on long edge

Flip on short edge

Flip on long edge The pages are flipped on their long edges. The front and rear have the same top.

Flip on short edge The pages are flipped on their short edges. The front and rear have tops at opposite ends.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Layout].

Check the [Print on Both Sides] checkbox.

258

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Select the [Binding].

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Duplex].

Check the [Print on Both Sides] checkboxes.

259

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (Document Pages/Print Pages/Layout Direction)
This prints multiple pages of consecutive data combined on one side of one sheet of paper. When the size of the document set by the application is larger than the print paper size, one page of the document is printed laid out over multiple sheets of paper. The print image is automatically enlarged/reduced to match the size of the print paper.

Document pages/print pages


From 2 to 16 pages of data can be combined on 1 page and 1 page can be divided into 4 (2x2) to 36 (6x6) units. Printing multiple document pages on one sheet paper

Printing one document page on multiple sheets of paper

260

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Layout direction
The order in which pages can be assigned onto one print page can be selected. [From top left to bottom right] or [From top right to bottom left] can be selected.

2 pgs/sheet

4 pgs/sheet

6 pgs/sheet

9 pgs/sheet

16 pgs/sheet

Frames/lines
This prints frames or lines on combined pages.

None

Frame

Lines

261

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Layout].

In [Pages per sheet], select the type of combination.

4 5

In [Layout direction], select the document page order. In [Border], select the type of frame or line.

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Layout].

262

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

In [Pages per Sheet], select the type of combination.

In [Layout Direction], select the document page order.

In [Border], select the type of frame or line.

263

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Folding Paper in Two to Make Booklets (Special Mode)


This prints swapping the order of the pages so that the output paper can be compiled and folded in two to make a booklet. You can select either [Booklet (left binding)] or [Booklet (right binding)].

Booklet (left binding) The paper is bound on the left side. This is selected when the pages read from left to right.

Booklet (right binding) The paper is bound on the right side. This is selected when the pages proceed from right to left.

Booklet/special mode cannot be used when any of the settings below are in effect. When [Document pages/print page], [Staple], [Duplex], or [Front cover/Back cover] is set.

264

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Combination], select either [Booklet] or [Booklet-Right].

265

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Image/Layout].

In [Combination], select either [Booklet] or [Booklet-Right].

266

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Printing One Copy at a Time of All Pages (Collate)


This prints one entire set of multi-page data at one time.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Collate], select [Sort].

267

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Copies&Pages].

Check the [Collated] checkbox.

268

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Outputting Sorted into Separate Sets of Copies (Offset)


When printing multiple copies, this shifts the output position for each set. This is handy when outputting multiple copies to a single output tray.

When the copier optional paper output unit is installed, the paper is output with its position shifted for each set. When the paper output unit is not installed, the paper is output with the direction changed for each set.

When there is a paper output unit

When there is no paper output unit

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Printer Specific Options].

269

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

In [Job Offset], select [On].

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Finishing].

In [Job Offset], select [On].

270

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Stapling (Staple)
This staples. Portrait and landscape Stapling with the papers joined lengthwise is called [Portrait] and stapling with the papers joined widthwise is called [Landscape]. Number of staples and their locations The pages are bound on either the left or right side of the paper. For stapling, you can select one- or two-point stapling.
For details on the stapling positions, refer to the copier users manual.

271

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages


The types of stapling that can be selected are as follows.
Portrait Landscape

Single Left

Single Left

Single Right

Single Right

Double Left

Double Left

Double Top

Double Top

Double Right

Double Right

Stapling cannot be set when a [Media Type] of [OHP], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (Print)] is set.

272

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Stapling], select the stapling type.

To set either portrait or landscape, change the [Direction] setting.

273

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Finishing].

In [Stapling], select the stapling type.

274

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Punch/Punch Holes
This punches holes in the document. Portrait and Landscape Punching the papers joined lengthwise is called [Portrait] and punching the papers joined widthwise is called [Landscape]. Left This punches holes on the left side of the document. Used to fasten the page from the left side.

Left (Portrait)

Left (Landscape)

Right This punches holes on the right side of the document. Used to fasten the page from the right side.

Right (Portrait)

Right (Landscape)

Top This punches holes on the top side of the document. Used to fasten the page from the top.

Top (Portrait)

Top (Landscape)

Punch count settings are different every destination. 2 Holes [2/3 Hole Type] (for U.S. and Canada market area only) 3 Holes [2/3 Hole Type] (for U.S. and Canada market area only) 4 Holes [4 Hole Type]

275

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Punch], select the location of the punch.

In [Punch Holes], select the number of the punch holes.

276

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Finishing].

In [Punch], select the location of the punch.

In [Punch Holes], select the number of the punch holes.

277

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Fold&Stitch
Fold or bind a sheet in the center and output. Fold The sheet to be output is folded at the center and output. Stitch Staple at two sections in the center of sheet to be output, then fold it into two and output.

If the Fold & Stitch option is used in the Booklet mode, a sheet that is bound at the center and folded into two is output. (In the Booklet mode only, sheets are not folded into two and output.)

Fold & Stitch cannot be used when the following settings are selected. When B6, F4 or 16K is selected for the [Paper Size]. If Staple, Offset, or Punch is selected. When Collate is not selected (Sort is not selected)

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

Select [Print] from the File menu. Select [Printer Specific Options].

278

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Select [Saddle Tray] from [Output bin].

Select [Fold only] or [Fold, Stitch] from [Fold, Stitch].

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

Select [Print] from the File menu. Select [Finishing].

279

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Select [Saddle Tray] from [Output bin].

Select [Fold only] or [Fold, Stitch] from [Fold, Stitch].

280

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Attaching a Front Cover/Back Cover (Front Cover/Back Cover)


This prints attaching a front cover or back cover. Front cover This prints a front cover. For the front cover, select either [Blank] or [Printed]. For [Blank], one sheet of blank paper is added. For [Printed], the first page of the data is printed on the front cover.

When the front cover is set to [Blank]

When the front cover is set to [Printed]

Back Cover This prints attaching a back cover. For the back cover, select either [Blank] or [Printed]. For [Blank], one sheet of white paper is added. For [Printed], the last page of the data is printed on the back cover.

When the back cover is set to [Blank]

When the back cover is set to [Printed]

Front/Back Cover Tray Select the tray in which the paper for the front cover/back cover is set. Select a tray with paper the same size as the main text.

Front cover/back cover cannot be set when any of the following settings are in effect: When [Booklet] is set When [Sort] is not set When a [Media type] of [OHP], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (Print)] is selected When a [Paper size] of [B6], [Legal], or [Statement] is selected

281

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Front Cover] or [Back Cover], select [Printed] or [Blank].

In [Front/Back Cover Tray], select the tray in which the paper for the front cover/back cover is set.

282

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-4. Printing Multiple Pages

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Setup].

In [Cover] or [Back Cover], select [Printed] or [Blank].

In [Cover Tray], select the tray in which the paper for the front cover/back cover.

283

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-5. Special Printing


Printing with Top/Bottom or Left/Right Reversed (Mirror Image Printing)
This prints with the top/bottom or left/right reversed, as if in a mirror.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].


For some applications, from the [File] menu item, select [Paper settings] - [Options].

Select [PostScript Options].

Check the [Visual Effects] [Flip Horizontal] or [Flip Vertical] checkbox.

The figure in the print example is printed with left/right or top/bottom reversed.

284

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-5. Special Printing

Printing with Black and White Reversed (Negative Image Printing)


This prints with the black and white sections of the document reversed like a negative film.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].


For some applications, from the [File] menu item, select [Paper settings] - [Options].

Select [PostScript Options].

Check the [Visual Effects] [Invert Image] checkbox.

Black and white in the printing are reversed.

285

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-5. Special Printing

Printing Watermarks (Watermark)


This prints preset text as a watermark.

The following five watermarks are registered when the printer driver is installed.
PICT EPS TEXT Adobe-PICT2 Confidential.pict Adobe.B&W.eps Adobe.color.eps Draft

For [TEXT], you can use the edit functions to change.

Selecting a watermark (Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x)

From the [File] menu item, select [Page setup].


For some applications, from the [File] menu item, select [Paper settings] - [Options].

Select [Watermark].

286

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-5. Special Printing

Select [First] or [All].

For [First], the watermark is only printed on the first page, for [All], the watermark is printed on all the pages.

4 5

Select [PICT], [EPS], or [TEXT]. Select the type of watermark to print.

Editing text
When you select [TEXT], you can change the watermark character contents, types, and color.

Click the [Edit] button. The [Watermark Specification] screen is displayed.

The settings that can be changed are as follows. Watermark file This selects the file in which the watermark is stored. Watermark font/size/style This sets the font and size for the watermark. Watermark text This inputs the character string for the watermark. Color Not Available. New save This saves the changed settings as a watermark file.

287

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-5. Special Printing

This printing system does not support color. When colors are selected, they are printed converted to gray.

First/All
The print the watermark only on the first page, select [First], to print the watermark on all the pages, select [All].

Foreground
The watermark is usually printed in such a way that the document can be seen through the watermark. To print a watermark over the document, check the [Foreground] checkbox. With this type of printing, the portion of the document under the watermark cannot be seen.

Save with Document


This stores the edited watermark settings together with the document data.

288

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-5. Special Printing

Smoothing Characters and Curved Lines (Smoothing)


This smoothes curved sections in printed characters and images to make jaggedness (the rough sections seen at the edges of figures and the like) stand out less.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Smoothing], select the type.

The types that can be selected are as follows. None: No smoothing Type 1: Smoothes diagonal lines in general characters and figures. Type 2: Smoothes curved sections of general characters. Type 3: Smoothes the more detailed sections, for example curved line sections of decorative and fine characters.

289

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-5. Special Printing

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Image/Layout].

In [Smoothing], select the type.

The types that can be selected are as follows. None: No smoothing Type 1: Smoothes diagonal lines in general characters and figures. Type 2: Smoothes curved sections of general characters. Type 3: Smoothes the more detailed sections, for example curved line sections of decorative and fine characters.

290

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-5. Special Printing

Conserving Toner (Toner Save)


This controls the print density and conserves the toner.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Toner Save], select [On].

291

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-5. Special Printing

Mac OS X v10.2x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [Image/Layout].

In [Toner Save], select [On].

292

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

4-6. Making PostScript Settings (File Save)


This makes settings such as the PostScript format.

Mac OS 8.x or Higher up to Version 9.x

1 2

From the [File] menu item, select [Print]. Select [PostScript Settings].

The screen may vary depending on the version of operating system.

Format
This sets the data format for writing to files.

PostScript Job This is selected for normal printing and for writing to PostScript files (PS files).
On the applications [Print] screen, if there is no [Output to file], the data is written to a PostScript file.

EPS Mac Standard Preview This is selected for writing to an EPS file with a bitmap format preview attached.
Files written as EPS files can be opened on other applications.

EPS Mac Enhanced Preview This is selected for writing to an EPS file with a PICT format preview attached. EPS No Preview This is selected for writing to an EPS file with no preview attached.

4-6. Making PostScript Settings (File Save)

PostScript level
This sets the PostScript language level. Select the PostScript level supported by the printer. The PostScript levels that can be selected are as follows. Level 1, 2 and 3 Compatible Level 2 Only Level 3 Only

Format
This selects the protocol (which determines the communications procedure) for data communications with the printer. ASCII This format can be printed on all printers. This is the format normally selected. Binary This has smaller data volumes than ASCII, so printing is faster, but it is not supported by all applications and printers.

Font Inclusion
Font data can be stored together with the document data in a file. The methods of font inclusion are as follows. None All All But Standard 13 All But Fonts in PPD file

294

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing from a Macintosh

II Printer

Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)

The print count can be managed on the printing system. This function is called the [Printer EKC/ECM]. This chapter explains the printing method when the Printer EKC/ECM is set and count management.

5-1. Managing the Print Count ................................................................296 5-2. Printer EKC/ECM Settings ................................................................297

295

5-1. Managing the Print Count


The print count can be managed from this printing system. This function is called the Printer EKC/ECM. Managing the print count requires the settings below to be made on the copier. Printer EKC/ECM settings The settings for using the Printer EKC/ECM function are made in [Key operator settings]. User ID registration for each user This sets the User ID input by the user when printing. Counters function for each of these User IDs. User IDs can be numbers up to eight digits long. Limiter value settings When the number of sheets printed for each user is restricted, the upper limit on the print count (limiter value) must be set.

EKC/ECM operations and settings changes should be made by the administrator. For details, refer to the copier users manual.

296

II Printer Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)

5-2. Printer EKC/ECM Settings


When the Printer EKC/ECM is set for this printing system, the functions below can be used.

Printer EKC/ECM Printing


Printing is carried out as set by the Printer EKC/ECM.

Setting with the PCL Driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

1 2

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab. Check the [User Settings...] button.

The [Password Print] screen is displayed.

For the [User ID], input the User ID set for the copier.

User IDs can be up to 8 digits.

Click the [OK] button. The display returns to the properties screen.

297

II Printer Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)

5-2. Printer EKC/ECM Settings

5 6

Click the [OK] button. The display returns to the [Print] screen. To print, click the [OK] button.

If the User ID was input incorrectly or not input at all, the print job is not printed, but instead is registered as an incomplete job. For details on checking on the Incomplete job list, refer to [6-3. Checking Incomplete Jobs] ( Page 306). If you do not know your User ID, ask your system administrator.

Setting with the PCL driver (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)

From the PCL driver [Printing Preferences], select the [Paper] tab.
For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences]

Check the [User Setting] button.

The [User Setting] screen is displayed.

298

II Printer Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)

5-2. Printer EKC/ECM Settings

For the [User ID], input the User ID set for the copier.

User IDs can be up to 8 digits.

4 5 6

Click the [OK] button. The display returns to properties screen. Click the [OK] button. The display returns to the [Print] screen. To print, click the [OK] button.

If the User ID was input incorrectly or not input at all, the print job is not printed, but instead is registered as an incomplete job. For details on checking on the Incomplete job list, refer to [6-3. Checking Incomplete Jobs] ( Page 306). If you do not know your User ID, ask your system administrator.

299

II Printer Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)

5-2. Printer EKC/ECM Settings

Reading Counter Values


The number of sheets printed is counted for each user for whom an User ID is set. This count is called the [EKC/ECM counter]. In [Key operator mode], the EKC/ECM counter value can be checked on the LCD of the copying machine.
To check the EKC counter value in [Key operator mode], refer to the copier user's manual.

EKC/ECM Limits
When the limit on the number of sheets printed is decided for each user ID on the copier, the printer operates as follows at the point in time when the limit (limiter value) is reached. One of the following operations is executed if a print command is sent when the EKC/ECM limit has been exceeded: A message is displayed on the LCD screen saying that the EKC/ECM counter has exceeded its limit and printing is executed normally. The print job is not printed, but instead is registered in the [incomplete job list]. When the EKC/ECM limit is exceed during printing, one of the following operations is executed. The fact that the EKC/ECM counter has exceeded its limiter value is displayed. Printing is executed normally. After this print job has ended, job reception is stopped. Print jobs sent after this are registered in the [Incomplete job list]. Stop printing when the limit setting is reached. Print the number of sheets up to limit setting and cancel the remaining sheets. Sheets in feeding are printed and outputted.

The choices of operations depend on the settings on the copier. For details, ask your system administrator. For details on checking on the Incomplete job list, refer to [6-3. Checking Incomplete Jobs] ( Page 306).

300

II Printer Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)

II Printer

Chapter 6 Printing Problems

This chapter explains how to handle problems that may be experienced with the printer in printing. If the methods during this chapter do not solve the problem, please contact your service representative.

6-1. Problems with Printing .....................................................................302 6-2. Problems Printing with the Adobe PostScript Driver ....................305 6-3. Checking Incomplete Jobs...............................................................306

301

6-1. Problems with Printing


No Printing.
Check the following, in order.

1 2 3

Check that the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-xxx] is selected as the printer. Check that the main body power is switched On. Print a [Test page].
If you can print a test page, but jobs from the computer cannot be printed, notifying the system administrator or service representative.

The Paper Type Cannot Be Selected.


Check the following, in order.

1 2

Click the [Paper] tab and [Cover] tab [Restore Defaults] button to restore the settings to default state. Select the paper tray containing the paper to print as the [Paper Source].

302

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

6-1. Problems with Printing

Test Page Cannot Be Printed.


Check the following, in order.

1 2 3 4 5

Check if cables to be connected with a printer is secure.


If the cables are securely connected, go to Step 2.

Check the copier control panel LCD screen.


If [Ready to Copy] is displayed, proceed to Step 4. If a diagnostics message or error message is displayed, refer to the copier users manual. If nothing at all is displayed, proceed to Step 3.

Press the sub power switch on the control panel.


If the copier is in auto shut-off mode, pressing this switch puts the LCD screen into display mode.

Check that copying is possible.


If copying is possible, proceed to Step 5.

Switch off the copiers main power, then restart it. Once the print controller can be used, print a test page again.

When you switch the main power for the copier ON/OFF, wait at least 10 seconds before switching it On again. Switching the main power On again too quickly can cause a system error.

If you still cannot print a test page, contact your service representative.

303

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

6-1. Problems with Printing

The Print Settings and Print Results Do Not Match.


Check the following operations.

Check that the printer settings have not been changed.


For details on printer settings, refer to [Chapter 3 Printing from Windows] ( Printing from a Macintosh] ( Page 232). Page 112) or [Chapter 4

Duplex Printing Is Not Possible.


Check the following, in order.

1 2 3 4

Click the [Paper] tab and [Cover] tab [Restore Defaults] button and restore the default state. Check that [B6] is not selected as the [Paper Size:]. Check that [Plain paper] is selected as the [Media Type]. Check that the [Combination] checkbox is not checked.

Forms Cannot Be Printed.


If any of the following conditions occur, forms cannot be printed.

The form data size exceeds the maximum value.


The relationship between the maximum form data size and the amount of memory in the Print Controller is as follows.
Amount of memory 64 MB (no expansion memory) 192 MB (128 MB expansion memory)
For details on memory, refer to [21-5. Options] (

Maximum form data size about 2.6 MB about 7.8 MB


Page 466).

304

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

6-2. Problems Printing with the Adobe PostScript Driver


PostScript Error Is Displayed.
For details on the PostScript errors, refer to the Adobe homepage http://www.adobe.com.

[Vmerror], [limitcheck], or Other PostScript Error Is Displayed.


It is possible that either the printer or the copier main unit memory is insufficient. We recommend increasing the memory.

PostScript Error Is Displayed No Matter Which Computer Is Attempting to Print.


Consult with our service shop.

PostScript Error Is Displayed for Printing from a Specific Application.


Some error attributed to settings of application software is considered. Recheck the settings, referring to the instruction manual or the like for application software. There may be a problem in the application. Print a test file with this application. If the application cannot print a test file, reinstall the application.

PostScript Error Is Displayed for Printing a Specific File.


The file print settings may be incorrect, an included figure may be corrupted, or there may be a problem element included in the file. Try changing the print settings and printing. If printing is still not possible, save the file as a new file or with a difficult name. Then, retry printing suitably.

PostScript Error Is Displayed for Printing a Specific Page.


An element or font on the page may be corrupted or that the memory required is more than is available for printing. Try printing one element or font at a time from the page. If the individual fonts and elements can be printed, but the page as a whole cannot be printed, we recommend increasing the memory.

Non Fixed Size Paper (Custom) Cannot Be Printed Correctly with a Macintosh.
The direction in which non fixed size paper is loaded in the copier may be incorrect. Rotate the paper direction 90 degrees and then try printing after changing the settings of the driver and copier accordingly.

305

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

6-3. Checking Incomplete Jobs


If there is an incomplete job, you can check in [Incomplete job list] screen. The [Incomplete job list] screen can be displayed by using the following method.

1 2

Touch the [JOB LIST] key on [Printer basic mode] screen.


The [JOB LIST] screen is displayed.

Touch the [Incomplete job] key.


The [Incomplete job list] screen is displayed. If the job you're looking for is not displayed, touch the [ ], [ ] key to scroll the display.

Contents displayed in the incomplete job list


On the incomplete job list, you can check the mode, filename or application name, cause, etc. The contents displayed on the incomplete job list are as follows.
Mode Cause Contents Stopping with STOP or CLEAR, deletion from job list, key counter removal/setting, cancel requests from print controller, aborted jobs, loading inhibited due to fixing Web count, copy inhibited until L inspection, memory error A job that was not output because the User ID was incorrect A job that was not output because the Printer EKC/ECM limit value was exceeded A job that was not output because the copier memory was full Stopping with STOP or CLEAR, deletion from job list, cancel requests from print controller, aborted jobs, transmission and fax controller not installed, pipe transmission error, file memory full A job for which uploading could not be completed because the hard disk was full A job that was not output because the copier memory was full

Cancel

Printer

Incorrect ID Over limit Memory overflow

Cancel PC-FAX Hard disk full Memory overflow

[Incomplete job list] screen, when you touch the [FAX JOB] key or the [PRINT JOB] key, the display returns to the [JOB LIST] screen. When the main power for the copier is switched off, the incomplete jobs displayed on the [Incomplete job list] screen are deleted.

306

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

III Fax
This chapter explains the operations for sending faxes using a computer.

Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)... 308 Chapter 8 Sending Faxes.................. 312 Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration . 321

307

III Fax

Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)

When an optional fax kit is installed, you can send faxes directly on the computer without using paper. This is called [PC-Fax]. This chapter summarizes the PC-Fax functions and explains the general flow of their processing.

7-1. Sending Faxes from the Computer .................................................309 7-2. Registering Recipient Names and their Fax Numbers...................310 7-3. Using PC-Fax .....................................................................................311

308

7-1. Sending Faxes from the Computer


Normally, when a fax is sent, a handwritten or printed document is set in the fax machine and transmitted. When the PC-Fax functions are used, you can use the computer to send and receive faxes directly without using paper. The transmission command sent from the application is received by the printer driver. When this printing system is used as a local printer, data is sent to the copier then to the print controller via the parallel interface (IEEE1284); when it is used as a network printer, the data is sent via Ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX). The Print Controller executes rasterizing processing for the picture (converting the output characters and pictures into bit-map data). This data is accumulated in the E-RDH memory in the copier and transmitted as a fax.

Computer Using as local printer Application Using as USB printer Application Using as network printer Application

Printer driver

Printer driver

Printer driver

Parallel interface (IEEE1294)

USB

Ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX)

Copier Fax transmission E-RDH memory Print

Print Controller PDL processing (rasterizing)

To use PC-Fax, it is necessary to install the optional fax kit on the copier main unit. For details, consult your service representative.

309

III Fax Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)

7-2. Registering Recipient Names and their Fax Numbers


You can register and manage recipient names and their fax numbers in the phonebook. These transmission recipients can be put together into groups. You can send a document to all the members of a group with just a single operation.

Phonebook

Broadcast Group 1

Broadcast Group 2

310

III Fax Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)

7-3. Using PC-Fax


Operating Systems Supported by PC-Fax
The PC-Fax functions are executed using the PCL driver. The PC-Fax functions work on the following operations systems. Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000 Windows XP

Setting the Fax Unit


First, ready the fax kit installed on the copier for use.

1 2 3

Display the PCL driver [Properties].


For details on how to display [Properties], refer to [3-1. Setting Printer Functions] ( Page 113).

Select the [Setup] tab. In [Available options], select [Fax option], then click the [Add] button.
[Fax option] is displayed on the [Installed options].

For optional menus on Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP, only the user having administrator rights can set them.

Click the [OK] button. 311


III Fax Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)

III Fax

Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

This chapter explains the procedures for sending faxes.

8-1. Transmission Procedure ..................................................................313 8-2. Setting a Cover Sheet (Windows NT/2000/XP) ...............................318 8-3. PC-Fax Transmission Error Reports ...............................................320

312

8-1. Transmission Procedure


This section explains how to use a computer to send files as faxes using PC-Fax.
To use the PC-FAX feature of the IP-432, you must install an optional fax kit.

Fax Transmission

1 2

Open data with the application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.

Check that the [Name] is [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx].

3 4 5

Click the [Properties] button.


The [Properties] screen is displayed.

Select the [FAX] tab. In [Mode Selection], select the [FAX].

313

III Fax Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

8-1. Transmission Procedure

In [Resolution], select either [200 dpi] (fine mode) or [400 dpi] (super fine mode).

7 8

Click the [Setup] button.


The [Fax Mode Setup] screen is displayed.

To print a file after a fax is sent, select [Print After Send].

To set a time to send the fax later, select [Delayed Transmission], then at [Time you want to transmit], either click the [] or [] button or key in the time.
When using timer send, check that the clocks on the computer and the copier are synchronized.If the send time is earlier than the Copier current time, the fax is sent the next day. Example: Send time 12:00 Copier current time 12:10 Fax sent at 12:00 the next day

10

For confidential transmission, select or input the [Sub Address] and [Sender ID].
It is possible to execute confidential communications with another fax model by using F codes. The sub-address is up to 20 digits. The sender ID is up to 20 digits including # and *. For details on sub-addresses and send IDs, refer to the fax kit users manual.

314

III Fax Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

8-1. Transmission Procedure

11 12

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Properties] screen.

Specifying the fax destination.


When inputting the fax recipient
At [Recipient], input the [Name] and [Fax No.], then click the [Add] button.

The recipient input into the [Recipients] is displayed.


The [Name] can be up to 40 characters. The [Fax No.] may be up to 38 digits (0 to 9), hyphens, #, *, E, P, T and spaces. Up to 100 recipients may be registered in the [Recipient].

Selecting the recipient from the phonebook


This procedure selects a recipient preset in the phone book.
For details on phonebook registration, refer to [Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration] ( Page 321)

Click the [Phonebook] button.

The [Phonebook] screen is displayed.

315

III Fax Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

8-1. Transmission Procedure

Select the recipient or broadcast group to send the fax to.

Click the [Add Recipient] button. The selected recipient is displayed in the [Recipient].
When a broadcast group is selected, all the members of the group are displayed in the [Recipient].

Check the recipient, then click the [OK] button. The display returns to the [FAX] tab.

13

Check that the party for file transmission is displayed in the [Recipient].
To delete a recipient, select the recipient to delete from the [Recipient], then click the [Delete] button. There is no need to change the [Error Correction Mode], [Intl Transmission Mode], and [V.34 Mode] checkboxes. For details, refer to the fax kit users manual.

14

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Print] screen.

316

III Fax Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

8-1. Transmission Procedure

15

Click the [OK] button.


The fax transmission check message is displayed.

16

Click the [OK] button.

The fax is sent to the specified recipient.

317

III Fax Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

8-2. Setting a Cover Sheet (Windows NT/2000/XP)


Create a cover sheet to be attached to a fax message.

Check the [Cover Sheet] checkbox.

2 3

Click the [Setup] button.


The [Coversheet Setup] screen is displayed.

Check the checkboxes for items to be added on the cover sheet such as [Name], [FAX Number] and [Comments] under Recipient. If you check the [Comment] checkbox, input a message under Comments.

For the [Name] and [FAX Number], only the first item of information in the Enter Recipient field under the [FAX] tab is displayed on the screen. Up to 640 characters can be input for Comments.

If more than 50 characters are input per line, the characters may not display correctly on the cover sheet. In such instances, check the characters on the Screen and insert a return, etc., to adjust the number of characters/line as required.

318

III Fax Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

8-2. Setting a Cover Sheet (Windows NT/2000/XP)

Check the checkboxes for the items to be added on the cover sheet from the [Title], [Company], [Name], [FAX Number] and [Phone] under Sender and input the required information.

Up to 40 characters can be input for each information field.

Click the [OK] button.

319

III Fax Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

8-3. PC-Fax Transmission Error Reports


If an error occurs during PC-Fax transmission, an error report is printed automatically.

PC-Fax Tx Error Report

REMOTE STATION Factor

CREATE

START

Cause Mem Full test .pdf

Name

Cancel : Stop PC-Fax job, ID difer : EKC/ECM user ID differ, Limit over : EKC/ECM counter limit over HD full : Hard disc full, Mem full : Memory over

Failed to PC-Fax Tx. Please check and try PC-Fax Tx again!

If you do not want error reports printed automatically, use the operator panel keys and switch [Report output settings] [PC-Fax transmission error reports] - [Off].

REMOTE STATION Fax number for the first recipient CREATE Time at which PC-Fax transmission was executed on the computer START Time specified for the timer reservation Cause Cause of the error Name Job name or user name

320

III Fax Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

III Fax

Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

You can register and manage recipient information in the phonebook. This chapter explains how to use the phonebook.

9-1. Registering Phonebook ....................................................................322 9-2. Managing Phonebooks .....................................................................331 9-3. Phonebook Usage .............................................................................334

321

9-1. Registering Phonebook


Registering parties to which you send fax documents into the phonebook.
To use the PC-FAX feature of the IP-432, you must install an optional fax kit.

Registering Recipient Information

1 2

Open data with the application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.

Check that [Name] is [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx].

3 4 5 6

Click the [Properties] button.


The [Properties] screen is displayed.

Select the [FAX] tab. In [Mode Selection], select the [FAX]. Click the [Phonebook] button.

The [Phonebook] screen is displayed.

322

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering Phonebook

Click the [Personal] button.

The [Personal Information] screen is displayed.

Input the [Name], [Fax No.], [Company], and [Department].

When inputting into the name column of the phonebook, you may include honorifics. There is no need to change the [ECM], [Int.Tx], and [V.34] checkboxes. For details, refer to the fax kit users manual. For the [Name], [Company], and [Department], up to 40 byte characters may be input. [Fax No.] may be up to 38 byte numbers (0 to 9), hyphens, #, *, E, P, T and spaces.

Click the [OK] button.


The recipient is registered and displayed in the recipient column.

323

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering Phonebook

Creating groups of recipients


Recipients can be registered into groups, such as [suppliers] or [branch companies].

Broadcast transmission is not possible using groups prepared here.

On the [Phonebook] screen, click the [Folder] button.

The [Folder Information] screen is displayed.

Input the [Folder Name].

The folder name may be up to 40 characters.

3 4 5

Click the [OK] button. The folder is registered and displayed in the layer column. Select the recipient to be registered into the group from the left-side directory tree. Right click, then select [Copy] or [Cut].
Folders can be set up to three layers deep.

6 7

Select the group into which to register the recipient from the left-side directory tree. Right click, then select [Paste]. The recipient information is registered in the group.

324

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering Phonebook

Revising recipient information

On the [Phonebook] screen, select the recipient to be changed from the recipient information column.

The selected recipient information is displayed inverted.

2 3

Click the [Edit] button. The [Personal Information] screen is displayed Revise any necessary items.

325

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering Phonebook

Deleting unnecessary recipients and folders


On the [Phonebook] screen, select the recipient or folder to delete.

1 2

On the [Phonebook] screen, select the recipient information or folder to be deleted. The selected recipient information or folder is displayed inverted. Click the [Delete] button.

The confirmation message is displayed.

Click the [Yes] button.

The specified recipient or folder is deleted.

326

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering Phonebook

Registering Broadcast Group


You can pre-register the recipients to which you want to send the same fax. Such a group is called a [broadcast group].

On the [Phonebook] screen, select the recipient to be registered into the broadcast group from the recipient information column.

The selected recipient information is displayed inverted.

Right click, then from the [Add Group] broadcast group list, select the broadcast group to register into.

The recipient is copied into the selected broadcast group.

327

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering Phonebook

Deleting a recipient from a broadcast group

On the [Phonebook] screen, select the broadcast group in which the recipient is registered from the broadcast group column.

The selected broadcast group is displayed inverted and the recipients registered in that broadcast group are displayed in the recipient column.

Select the recipient to delete from the recipient column.

The selected recipient is displayed inverted.

328

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering Phonebook

Right click, then select [Delete from Group].

The recipient is deleted from the broadcast group.

Ten broadcast groups can be set. You cannot add or delete broadcast groups. The total number of recipients that can be registered in all 10 broadcast groups is 100.

329

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering Phonebook

Naming a broadcast group

On the [Phonebook] screen, select the broadcast group to be named from the broadcast group column.

The selected broadcast group is displayed inverted.

Right click, then select the [Edit] screen.

The [Group Information] screen is displayed

Input the [Group Name].

The group name may be up to 40 characters.

Click the [OK] button. The group name is registered and displayed in the broadcast group column.

330

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-2. Managing Phonebooks


The phonebook in which recipient information is registered can be named and saved as a file. You can have multiple phonebooks for different usages.

Saving Phonebooks

When the registration of the information in the phonebook is complete, click the [OK] or [Apply] button on the [Phonebook] screen.

For details on registering in the phonebook, refer to [9-1. Registering Phonebook] (

Page 322)

Specify the storage location, then input the file name.

The extension of a file is [.csv].

Click the [Save] button.


The phonebook is saved as a file.

331

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-2. Managing Phonebooks

Preparing a New Phonebook

On the [Phonebook] screen, click [File] - [New].

The [IniBook.csv] folder is displayed in the layer column.

2 3 4 5

The recipient information is registered.


For details on registering in the phonebook, refer to [9-1. Registering Phonebook] ( Page 322)

Click the [OK] or [Apply] button.


The [Save As] screen is displayed.

Specify the storage location, then input the file name. Click the [Save] button.
The phonebook is saved as a file.

332

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-2. Managing Phonebooks

Switching Between Phonebooks


This is used to switch between phonebooks on the [Phonebook] screen.

On the [Phonebook] screen, click [File] - [Open].

The [Open] screen is displayed.

Select the folder for the phonebook to switch to, then click the [Open] button.

The selected phonebook is displayed.

333

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-3. Phonebook Usage


Specifying the recipients registered in the phonebook and sending the fax.

Sending Faxes Using the Phonebook

1 2

Click the [Phonebook] button on the [Fax] tab.


The [phonebook] screen is displayed.

Select the recipient or broadcast group to which send the fax.

3 4 5 6 7

Click the [Add Recipient] button.


The selected recipient is displayed in [Recipient]. If you have selected a broadcast group, all the recipients in that group are displayed.

If there are any unnecessary recipients in [Recipient], select them, then click the [Delete] button.
The unnecessary recipients are deleted from the send list.

Check the send list, then click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Fax] tab.

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Print] screen.

Send the fax.


For details on sending faxes, refer to [8-1. Transmission Procedure] ( Page 313)

334

III Fax Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

IV Control Panel
This volume explains the settings made by the printer administrator using the control panel.

Chapter 10 Printer Settings .............. 336 Chapter 11 Key Operator Settings... 369

335

IV Control Panel

Chapter 10 Printer Settings

This chapter explains the contents of the settings that can be made with operations on the copier's LCD screen.

10-1. Menu Configuration ........................................................................337 10-2. Test Print..........................................................................................340 10-3. Controller Settings ..........................................................................345 10-4. Print Default Setting........................................................................351 10-5. PCL Setup ........................................................................................361

336

10-1. Menu Configuration


When making printer settings with operations from the copier, the [Main Menu] screen is displayed with the following procedure.

Displaying the Main Menu Screen

1 2

With the [Copy basic mode] screen displayed, press the control panel.
The [Printer basic mode] screen is displayed.

(PRINTER) button on the

Touch the [Printer Set] key.

The [Main Menu] screen is displayed.

337

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-1. Menu Configuration


The following settings can be made from the [Main Menu] screen. The setting items depend on whether or not the PostScript option is installed. The items marked with * in the table are only displayed when the PostScript option is installed. The gray colored part in settings are factory defaults.
Menu item 1 Test Print Menu Setting item 1 PCL Demo Page 2 PCL Font List 3 PS Demo Page * 4 PS Font List * 5 Config. Data 2 Controller set 1 Banner Page 2 Banner Page Tray 1 On 2 Off 1 Auto Tray 2 Tray1 3 Tray2 4 Tray3 5 Tray4 6 Tray5 7 Bypass Tray 3 PDL Select * 1 Auto 2 PCL 3 Post Script 3 Set Default 1 Default Paper 1 A3R 2 A4 3 A5R 4 B4R 5 B5 6 B6R 7 F4R 8 11 x 17R 9 8.5 x 14R 10 8.5 x 11 11 5.5 x 8.5R 12 8KR 13 16K 2 Duplex 1 Off 2 Long Edge 3 Short Edge 3 Orientation 4 Copies 5 Override Paper 1 Off 2 8.5 x 11 3 A4 A4 8.5 x 11 1 Portrait 2 Landscape Page 357 Page 359 Page 355 1 A3R 2 A4 3 A5R 4 B4R 5 B5 6 F4R 7 11 x 17R 8 8.5 x 14R 9 8.5 x 11 10 5.5 x 8.5R (For U.S. and Canada market area) Page 353 Page 351 Page 349 Page 347 Settings Reference page Page 340 Page 341 Page 342 Page 343 Page 344 Page 345

338

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-1. Menu Configuration


Menu item 4 PCL Setup Setting item 1 Point Size 2 Pitch 3 Font Number 4 Form Lines 5 CR/LF Mapping 12.00 10.00 11 60 1 Off 2 CR 3 LF 4 CR/LF 6 Input Tray 1 Auto Tray 2 Tray1 3 Tray2 4 Tray3 5 Tray4 6 Tray5 7 Bypass Tray 7 Symbol Set Page 368 Page 367 Settings 0.4 ~ 99.75 0.44 ~ 99.95 0 ~ 88 5 ~ 128 Reference page Page 362 Page 363 Page 364 Page 365 Page 366

339

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-2. Test Print


This can print samples of the fonts installed on the printer, a list of the printer default settings, etc. On the [Printer menu] screen, select [Test Print Menu].

PCL Demo Page


This prints samples of fonts installed on the printer.

Touch the [1] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337). The [Main Menu] screen displays with [1] already selected.

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Test Print Menu] screen is displayed.

Touch the [1] key.

The [Test Print Menu] screen displays with [1] already pressed.

Touch the [OK] key.


The display returns to the [Main Menu] screen and the PCL Demo Page is printed.
For a printed sample, refer to [21-6. Function List] ( Page 470).

340

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-2. Test Print

PCL Font List


This prints the list of fonts installed on the printer.

Touch the [1] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337). The [Main Menu] screen displays with [1] already selected.

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Test print] screen is displayed.

Touch the [2] key.

Touch the [OK] key.


The display returns to the [Main Menu] screen, and the PCL font list is printed.

341

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-2. Test Print

PS Demo Page (Only When PostScript Option Installed)


This prints a demo page for the Adobe PostScript.

Touch the [1] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337). The [Main Menu] screen displays with [1] already selected.

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Test Print Menu] screen is displayed.

Touch the [3] key.

Touch the [OK] key.


The display returns to the [Main Menu] screen and the PostScript demo page is printed.
For a printed sample, refer to [PostScript Font List] ( Page 496).

342

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-2. Test Print

PS Font List (Only When PostScript Option Installed)


This prints samples of the PostScript fonts installed on the printer.

Touch the [1] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337). The [Main Menu] screen displays with [1] already selected.

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Test Print Menu] screen is displayed.

Touch the [4] key.

Touch the [OK] key.


The display returns to the [Main Menu] screen and the PostScript font list is printed.
For a printed sample, refer to [PostScript Font List] ( Page 496).

343

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-2. Test Print

Config.Data
This prints a list of print controller setting information. The following information is printed on the setting information list. Version Info Current Settings (Resolution/Print Quality/Copy mode timeout/Default Paper size/Language) Installed Paper (Manual/Tray 1/Tray 2/Tray 3/Tray 4/Tray 5) Device Status (Total RAM installed/Hard disk free space) Miscellaneous (Total print page count)

Touch the [1] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337). The [Main Menu] screen displays with [1] already selected.

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Test Print Menu] screen is displayed.

Touch the [3] key. (When PostScript option is installed, touch the [5] key).

Touch the [OK] key.


The display returns to the [Main Menu] screen and the setting information list is printed.

344

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-3. Controller Settings


This prints samples of the installed fonts, a list of the printer default settings, etc. On [Main Menu] screen, select [Controller Set].

After changing control setting values, turn the main power OFF/ON in order for the changes to take effect.

Banner Page
This sets whether or not to print a banner page for each printing. The following information is listed on the banner page. The contents listed depend on the page description language. Job: User ID: The 3-digit job number; when [#999] is reached, the job number returns to [#001]. The User ID set with the printer driver; if not User ID is set, [N/A] is listed.

User Name: The computer log-on name; if there is no log-on name, [N/A] is listed. Title: Source: The name of the application printing and the file name. [Network] or [parallel].

Language: The page description language. Printed: The date and the time.

The factory default is [Off] (Do not print).

Touch the [2] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337).

Touch the [OK] key on [Main Menu] screen.


The [Controller Set] screen is displayed.

345

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-3. Controller Settings

Touch the [1] key.

The [Controller Set] screen displays with [1] already selected.

4 5

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Banner Page] screen is displayed.

To print a banner page for each printing, touch the [1] key; to not print, touch the [2] key.

6 7

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

After completing the controller settings and Initial settings, turn the main power OFF for 10 seconds, and ON once again for the changes to take effect.

346

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-3. Controller Settings

Banner Page Tray


This sets the input tray for banner pages.
The factory default is [Auto Tray].

Touch the [2] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337).

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Controller Set] screen is displayed.

Touch the [2] key.

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Banner Page Tray] screen is displayed.

347

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-3. Controller Settings

Touch one of the [1] - [7] keys.

[1] Auto Tray [2] Tray 1 [3] Tray 2 [4] Tray 3 (When input tray option is installed) [5] Tray 4 [6] Tray 5 [7] Bypass Tray
The number of tray depends on the option attached. This illustration appears when option DB-211 is included.

6 7

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

After completing the controller settings and Initial settings, turn the main power OFF for 10 seconds, and ON once again for the changes to take effect.

348

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-3. Controller Settings

PDL Select (Only When PostScript Option Installed)


This specifies the language used for printing. Normally, there is no need to change the factory default.
The factory default is [Auto].

When the PDL is changed, print jobs from another PDL driver are read as errors.

Touch the [2] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337).

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Controller Set] screen is displayed.

Touch the [3] key.

Touch the [OK] key.


The [PDL Select] screen is displayed.

349

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-3. Controller Settings

Touch one of the [1] - [3] keys.

[1] Auto [2] PCL [3] PostScript

6 7

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

After completing the controller settings and Initial settings, turn the main power OFF for 10 seconds, and ON once again for the changes to take effect.

350

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-4. Print Default Setting


This sets default settings such as the paper size or duplex printing etc. On the [Main Menu] screen, select [Print default settings].

When printing is executed from an application, if the settings made with the printer driver and the settings made here are different, the printer driver settings take priority. After changing the Print default settings, turn the main power OFF/ON in order for the changes to take effect.

Default Paper
This sets the default value for the paper size used for printing.
The factory default is [A4]. (For U.S. and Canada market area: The factory default is [8.5 x 11])

Touch the [3] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337).

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Set Default] screen is displayed.

Touch the [1] key.

The [Set Default] screen displays with [1] already selected.

351

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-4. Print Default Setting

4 5

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Default Paper] screen is displayed.

Touch one of the [1] - [10] keys.


[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] A3R A4 A5R B4R B5 B6R [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] F4R 11 x 17R 8.5 x 14R 8.5 x 11 5.5 x 8.5R 8KR 16K

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

A3R A4 A5R B4R B5

[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

F4R 11 x 17R 8.5 x 14R 8.5 x 11 5.5 x 8.5R

(For U.S. and Canada market area) To switch the items displayed on the [Default Paper] screen, touch the [<<] or [>>] key.

6 7

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

After completing the controller settings and Initial settings, turn the main power OFF for 10 seconds, and ON once again for the changes to take effect.

352

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-4. Print Default Setting

Duplex
This sets whether or not to print on both sides the paper as default.
The factory default is [Off]

Touch the [3] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337).

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Set Default] screen is displayed.

Touch the [2] key.

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Duplex] screen is displayed.

353

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-4. Print Default Setting

Touch one of the [1] - [3] keys.

[1] Print on one side only [2] Print on both sides (flip on long edge) [3] Print on both sides (flip on short edge)

6 7

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

After completing the controller settings and Initial settings, turn the main power OFF for 10 seconds, and ON once again for the changes to take effect.

354

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-4. Print Default Setting

Orientation
This sets the default direction for printing on the paper.
The factory default is [Portrait].

Touch the [3] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337).

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Set Default] screen is displayed.

Touch the [3] key.

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Orientation] screen is displayed.

355

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-4. Print Default Setting

To set the print direction to portrait, touch the [1] key; to set it to landscape, touch the [2] key.

6 7

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

After completing the controller settings and Initial settings, turn the main power OFF for 10 seconds, and ON once again for the changes to take effect.

356

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-4. Print Default Setting

Copies
This sets the default setting for the number of copies.
The factory default is [1].

Touch the [3] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337).

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Set Default] screen is displayed.

Touch the [4] key.

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Copies] screen is displayed.

357

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-4. Print Default Setting

Touch the number keys to input the number of copies from 1 to 9999.

6 7

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

After completing the controller settings and Initial settings, turn the main power OFF for 10 seconds, and ON once again for the changes to take effect.

358

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-4. Print Default Setting

Override Paper
This sets whether or not to convert the paper size automatically when the set paper is used.
The factory default is [Off]

Touch the [3] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337).

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Set Default] screen is displayed.

Touch the [5] key.

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Override Paper] screen is displayed.

359

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-4. Print Default Setting

Touch one of the [1] - [3] keys.

[1] Do not convert the paper size. [2] Convert 8.5x11 paper to A4 size automatically. [3] Convert A4 size paper to 8.5x11 automatically.

6 7

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

After completing the controller settings and Initial settings, turn the main power OFF for 10 seconds, and ON once again for the changes to take effect.

360

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-5. PCL Setup


This makes the detailed settings for printing with PCL.

Touch the [4] key on [Main Menu] screen.

For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu Screen] ( Page 337).

Touch the [OK] key.


The [PCL Setup] screen is displayed. The following settings are displayed. ( Page 362) Point Size Pitch Font Number Form Lines Input Tray Symbol Set
( ( ( Page 363) Page 364) Page 365) Page 366) Page 367) Page 368)

CR/LF Mapping (
( (

To switch the items displayed on the [PCL Setup] screen, touch the [PREV] or [NEXT] key.

361

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-5. PCL Setup

Point Size
This sets the font point size.
The factory default is [12.00].

Touch the [1] key on [PCL Setup] screen.

The [PCL Setup] screen displays with [1] already selected.

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Point Size] screen is displayed.

Touch the number keys to input a point size from 0.4 to 99.75.

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

362

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-5. PCL Setup

Pitch
This sets the character spacing.
The factory default is [10.00].

Touch the [2] key on [PCL Setup] screen.

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Pitch] screen is displayed.

Touch the number keys to input a pitch from 0.44 to 99.95.

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

363

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-5. PCL Setup

Font Number
This sets font numbers for printing.
The factory default is [11].

Touch the [3] key on [PCL Setup] screen.

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Font Number] screen is displayed.

Touch the number keys to input a font number from 0 to 88.

For details on font number, refer to [21-8. Font Number List (Control Panel-PCL Setup)] (

Page 500).

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

364

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-5. PCL Setup

Form Lines
This sets the number of lines for printing.
The factory default is [60].

Touch the [4] key on [PCL Setup] screen.

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Form Lines] screen is displayed.

Touch the number keys to input the number of lines from 5 to 128.

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

365

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-5. PCL Setup

CR/LF Mapping
This sets the type of line feed codes.
The factory default is [Off].

Touch the [5] key on [PCL Setup] screen.

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [CR/LF Mapping] screen is displayed.

Touch one of the [1] - [4] keys.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

Off CR LF CR/LF

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

366

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-5. PCL Setup

Input Tray
This sets the input tray containing the paper to print on.
The factory default is [Auto Tray].

Touch the [6] key on [PCL Setup] screen.

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Input Tray] screen is displayed.

Touch one of the [1] - [7] keys.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Auto Tray Tray1 Tray2 Tray3 (When input tray option is installed) Tray4 Tray5 Bypass Tray
The number of tray depends on the option attached.

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

367

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

10-5. PCL Setup

Symbol Set
This sets the symbol sets for printing.
The factory default is [ROMAN-8].

Touch the [7] key on [PCL Setup] screen.

2 3

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Symbol Set] screen is displayed.

Touch one of the [1] - [32] keys.

For details on Symbol set, refer to [21-9. Symbol Sets List (Control Panel-PCL Setup)] (

Page 503).

Touch the [OK] key.


The setting is stored.

368

IV Control Panel Chapter 10 Printer Settings

IV Control Panel

Chapter 11 Key Operator Settings

This chapter explains the contents of the settings that can be made with key operator mode on the copier.

11-1. Key Operator Mode .........................................................................370 11-2. Contents of Settings .......................................................................372

369

11-1. Key Operator Mode


Usage Objectives for Key Operator Mode
Key operator mode is for making detailed settings concerning the printer. To make the settings, use the [PrinterMemorySW] screen from key operator mode.

Switching the Key Operator Mode

Press the

(COPY) button on the control panel.

The [Copy basic mode] screen is displayed.

Press the

(HELP) button on the control panel.

The [HELP MODE] screen is displayed.

370

IV Control Panel Chapter 11 Key Operator Settings

11-1. Key Operator Mode

Touch the [Key Ope mode] key.

If a password is set, input the key operator password.

For details on passwords, refer to the copier users manual.

5 6

Touch the [OK] key.


The [Key operator mode] screen is displayed.

Touch the [5.Printer] key.

The [PrinterMemorySW] screen is displayed.

371

IV Control Panel Chapter 11 Key Operator Settings

11-2. Contents of Settings


The default values for the following items can be set with key operator mode. Auto reset timer Output tray PRINT W/O key count Moving to power save Job offset operation

Auto Reset Timer


You can set how long the copier will wait with the [Scanner] screen left unused until it automatically returns to the [Printer basic mode] screen.
The factory default is [Off] (Do not switch screens automatically.).

Select [Auto reset timer] on [PrinterMemorySW] screen.

When you touch the [ ] or [ ] key, the selection item is switched.


For details on the procedure for displaying the [PrinterMemorySW] screen, refer to [Switching the Key Operator Mode] ( Page 370).

Touch the [EDIT] key, then change the setting.


Each time you touch the [EDIT] key, the setting is switched. Select the setting item from among the following.
OFF, 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, 300 (seconds)

When you select [OFF], auto resets are not triggered.


As for the copier setting, if the [Valid] is selected, consult your service representative.

Touch the [RETURN] key.


From now on, the copier operates in accordance with this setting.

372

IV Control Panel Chapter 11 Key Operator Settings

11-2. Contents of Settings

Output Tray
This selects the tray to which to output print paper.
The factory default is [TRAY1].

Select [Output tray] on [Memory SW] screen.

When you touch the [ ] or [ ] key on the LCD screen, the selection item is switched.
For details on the procedure for displaying the [Memory SW] screen, refer to [Switching the Key Operator Mode] ( Page 370).

Touch the [EDIT] key, then change the setting.


Each time you touch the [EDIT] key, the setting is switched. Select the setting item from among the following. [TRAY1]: The Output tray 1 is set to default. [TRAY2]: The Output tray 2 is set to default. [TRAY3]: The Output tray 3 is set to default. [TRAY4]: The Output tray 4 is set to default.

Touch the [RETURN] key.


From now on, the copier operates with this settings.

373

IV Control Panel Chapter 11 Key Operator Settings

11-2. Contents of Settings

PRINT W/O Key Count


This sets whether to enable printing or disable printing when the key counter is removed during print operations.
The factory default is [Not valid] (printing is possible whether or not the key counter is present).

Select [PRINT W/O key count] on [PrinterMemorySW] screen.

When you touch the [ ] or [ ] key, the selection item is switched.


For details on the procedure for displaying the [PrinterMemorySW] screen, refer to [Switching the Key Operator Mode] ( Page 370).

Touch the [EDIT] key, then change the setting.


Each time you touch the [EDIT] key, the setting is switched. If you select [Valid], operation is according to the copier setting. If you select [Not Valid], printing is possible whether or not the key counter is present.
As for the copier setting, if the [Valid] is selected, consult your service representative.

Touch the [RETURN] key.


From now on, the copier operates in accordance with this setting.

374

IV Control Panel Chapter 11 Key Operator Settings

11-2. Contents of Settings

Moving to Power Save


This sets the standby time from when printing starts during power save mode until it returns to power save mode again.
For details on power save mode, refer to the copier users manual. The factory default is [Normal]. (The copier returns to power save mode after the time set as the power save time.)

Select [Moving to power save] on [PrinterMemorySW] screen.

When you touch the [ ] or [ ] key, the selection item is switched.


For details on the procedure for displaying the [PrinterMemorySW] screen, refer to [Switching the Key Operator Mode] ( Page 370).

Touch the [EDIT] key, then change the setting.


Each time you touch the [EDIT] key, the setting is switched. When you select [Normal], the copier returns to power save mode after the time set as the power save time. When you select [Immediate], the copier returns to power save mode about one minute after the end of printing.

Touch the [RETURN] key.


From now on, the copier operates in accordance with this setting.

375

IV Control Panel Chapter 11 Key Operator Settings

11-2. Contents of Settings

Job Offset Operation


[Collate] with a copying machine is functioned instead of instructing drivers [Collate].
For more detail on [Collate], refer to [Printing One Copy at a Time of All Pages (Collate/Sort)] ( The factory default is [ON]. Page 164).

Select [Job offset operation] on [PrinterMemorySW] screen.

When you touch the [ ] or [ ] key, the selection item is switched.


For details on the procedure for displaying the [PrinterMemorySW] screen, refer to [Switching the Key Operator Mode] ( Page 370).

2 3

Touch the [EDIT] key, then change the setting.


Each time you touch the [EDIT] key, the setting is switched. [ON]: [Collate] is done at any time. [OFF]: [Collate] is not done. However, if directed on the driver, [Collate] is done.

Touch the [RETURN] key.


From now on, the copier operates in accordance with this setting.

376

IV Control Panel Chapter 11 Key Operator Settings

V Network Print Settings


This volume explains how to make the network settings.

Chapter 12 Summary of Network Functions....................... 378 Chapter 13 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)381 Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/ 2000/XP only).................. 383 Chapter 15 Using with NetWare ....... 401 Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP) ........ 408 Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration........ 424 Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk ........ 436 Chapter 19 When There Is Network Printing Trouble ............. 451

377

V Network Print Settings

Chapter 12 Summary of Network Functions

This chapter summarizes the print controller network functions.

12-1. Network Functions ..........................................................................379

378

12-1. Network Functions


Features of Network Functions
This unit can handle various network environments flexibly and is equipped with the following network functions. 10Base-T/100Base-TX (Fast Ethernet) automatic selection It supports for multiple protocols (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (EtherTalk)) Through dedicated utilities, it supports IP Peer-to-Peer printing through TCP/IP from Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me. Through dedicated utilities, it supports IPX Peer-to-Peer printing through IPX/SPX from Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me. It supports LPD/LPR on TCP/IP for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP. It supports lpd/lpr on TCP/IP for UNIX. It supports PServer and RPrinter (NPrinter) of Novell Netware. It supports Novell NetWare printer server functions and supports both bindery mode and Novell Directory Service (NDS). It supports AppleTalk on Macintosh. It supports for acquiring IP addresses automatically through DHCP It supports for setting up Netware on NWSetup utility for Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP. It supports for assigning IP addresses on BOOTP Lite utility for Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP. It supports printing from various UNIX systems through UNIX-TCP/IP Programs.

Use with Peer-to-Peer Connections (Windows 95/98/Me)


With a LAN (Local Area Network) comprised solely of computers running Windows 95/98/Me, the printer can be used without a dedicated printer server. In this case, this printing system is connected to the network with a connection configuration called peer-to-peer.

Peer-to-peer: A network configuration that connects computers under equivalent conditions without using a central server.

379

V Network Print Settings Chapter 12 Summary of Network Functions

12-1. Network Functions

Use through LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)


This printing system supports printing with LPD/LPR with Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP. You can connect this printing system to a print server in a UNIX environment and send print instructions to the printer from Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP.
This must be a print request format that can be used with LPD (Line Printer Daemon)/LPR:Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP.

Using with UNIX


This printing system supports printing with lpd/lpr with UNIX. You can connect this printing system to a print server in a UNIX environment and sent print instructions to the printer from various UNIX systems.

Using with NetWare


The Novell NetWare 3.x6 printer server functions are supported. You can connect this printing system to a network that uses Novell NetWare 3.x or 4.x as the network OS and send print instructions to the printer server (network controller) from a client terminal.
For details on NetWare functions, refer to the NetWare manual.

Using with Macintosh (Only When PostScript Option Installed)


Printing on a Macintosh with AppleTalk is supported. You can connect this printing system to the AppleTalk environment print server and send print instructions to the printer from a Macintosh.

380

V Network Print Settings Chapter 12 Summary of Network Functions

V Network Print Settings

Chapter 13 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

This chapter explains the settings required for printing with a Windows 95/98/Me computer and this printing system connected in an IP Peer-to-Peer network.

13-1. IP Peer-to-Peer ................................................................................382

381

13-1. IP Peer-to-Peer
Peer-to-Peer is a network configuration in which the client computers are connected directly to each other without a server at the center of the network. Peer-to-Peer connections are used to configure a small-scale network with a few computers. This printer can send print jobs directly to the computers making up the Peer-to-Peer network without going through a dedicated server. This is called [Peer-to-Peer] printing.
Peer-to-Peer printing can be set and executed with Windows 95/98/Me.

For printing by Peer-to-Peer, please use utility software (Network Setup 2.0). For instructions regarding printing by Peer-to-Peer, refer to the instruction Manual [Network Setup 2.0].

382

V Network Print Settings Chapter 13 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

V Network Print Settings

Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

This chapter explains the settings required for printing with LPD/LPR using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 or Windows XP

14-1. LPD/LPR ...........................................................................................384 14-2. Preparations for Printing with LPD/LPR .......................................385 14-3. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows NT 4.0 ...........................................386 14-4. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows 2000..............................................391 14-5. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows XP .................................................396

383

14-1. LPD/LPR
An LPD (Line Printer Daemon) is a printer daemon (mechanism for executing printing) used with a standard print server; an LPR (Line Printer Remote) is the protocol for making print requests to a printer daemon. Printing using this LPD/LPR is possible from computers using Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP as their operating system. In printing with LPD/LPR, TCP/IP is used as the communications protocol.

384 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-2. Preparations for Printing with LPD/LPR


The computer and network controller are prepared with the following procedure.

1 2 3

An IP address is assigned to the network controller.


Refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

The network controller TCP/IP settings are made.


Refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

The computer TCP/IP settings are made.


Refer to the pages below. Windows NT 4.0 [Checking the Network Service]( Windows 2000 [Checking the Unix Print Service]( Windows XP [Checking the Unix Print Service]( Page 386) Page 391) Page 396)

The printer port and printer driver is added.


Refer to the pages below. Windows NT 4.0 [Adding a LPD/LPR Printer Port and Installing a Printer Driver (PCL Driver)] ( ( ( Page 387) Windows 2000 [Adding a LPD/LPR Printer Port and Installing a Printer Driver (PCL Driver)] Page 392) Windows XP [Adding a LPD/LPR Printer Port and Installing a Printer Driver (PCL Driver)] Page 396)

385 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-3. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows NT 4.0


This section explains how to make the settings with Windows NT 4.0.

Checking the Network Service


Printing with LPD/LPR requires that there be [Microsoft TCP/IP printing] and [Network service] in [Network service].

1 2 3 4

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] [Control Panel].


The [Control Panel] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Network] icon.


The [Network] screen is displayed.

Click the [Services] tab.


The [Network Services:] list is displayed.

Check that [Microsoft TCP/IP Printing] is in the list.


If it is not in the list, add it from the Windows setup CD-ROM.
For details on how to add a [Network Services], refer to the users manual for the operating system.

386 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-3. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows NT 4.0

Adding a LPD/LPR Printer Port and Installing a Printer Driver (PCL Driver)
This adds an LPD/LPR printer port and installs its printer driver.

1 2 3 4 5

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has installing rights such as a Power User.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From [My Computer], select the [CD-ROM] and then double click the [Setup. exe] in the [English] - [Printer] - [WinNT_2000_XP] folder. [Click the [OK] button.

The [Printer Driver Installer] screen is displayed.

Click the [Add a Port] tub.

387 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-3. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows NT 4.0

Select the [LPR Port].

Input in the columns of [Post Description] and [Port Name], and [Add Port] button.

The[Add LPR compatible printer] screen is displayed.

Enter the IP address assigned to the network controller in the column of [Name or address of server providing lpd].

10 11

Enter [printer] in small letters in the column of [Name of printer or print queen on that server] and click the [OK] button. Click the [OK] button.

388 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-3. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows NT 4.0

12

Click the [Install a Driver] tub.

13

Set up the following items.

[Printer Name]

Check the printer name. To change it, input a new printer name.

[Selecting the Printer Port]

Select the port to which the printer is connected.

389 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-3. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows NT 4.0

[Install as the Default Printer]

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, check the [Install as the Default Printer] checkbox.

14

When all the settings are complete, click the [Install] button.

15

Click the [Finished] button.

This completes printer driver installation.

390 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-4. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows 2000


This section explains how to make the settings with Windows 2000.

Checking the Unix Print Service


Printing with LPD/LPR requires that the Unix print services are installed and that they be usable. Check the settings with the following procedure.

1 2 3 4

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Control Panel].


The [Control Panel] window is displayed.

Double click [Network and Dial-up Connections] icon.


The [Network and Dial-up Connections] window is displayed.

Select [Advanced] [Optional Network Components].


The [Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard] screen is displayed.

Select [Other Network File and Print Services], then click the [Details] button.
The [Other Network File and Print Services] screen is displayed. If [Print Services for Unix] is not checked in the list, check that and add from the Windows setup CDROM.
For details on how to add a [Print Services for Unix], refer to the users manual for the operating system.

391 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-4. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows 2000

Adding a LPD/LPR Printer Port and Installing a Printer Driver (PCL Driver)
This adds an LPD/LPR printer port and installs its printer driver.

1 2 3 4 5

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has installing rights such as a Power User.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From [My Computer], select the [CD-ROM] and then double click the [Setup. exe] in the [English] - [Printer] - [WinNT_2000_XP] folder. [Click the [OK] button.

The [Printer Driver Installer] screen is displayed.

Click the [Add a Port] tub.

392 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-4. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows 2000

Select the [LPR Port].

Input in the columns of [Post Description] and [Port Name], and [Add Port] button.

The[Add LPR compatible printer] screen is displayed.

Enter the IP address assigned to the network controller in the column of [Name or address of server providing lpd].

10 11

Enter [printer] in small letters in the column of [Name of printer or print queen on that server] and click the [OK] button. Click the [OK] button.

393 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-4. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows 2000

12

Click the [Install a Driver] tub.

13

Set up the following items.

[Printer Name]

Check the printer name. To change it, input a new printer name.

[Selecting the Printer Port]

Select the port to which the printer is connected.

394 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-4. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows 2000

[Install as the Default Printer]

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, check the [Install as the Default Printer] checkbox.

14

When all the settings are complete, click the [Install] button.

15

Click the [Finished] button.

This completes printer driver installation.

395 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-5. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows XP


This section explains how to make these settings with Windows XP.

Checking the Unix Print Service


Printing with LPD/LPR requires that the Unix print services be installed and that they be usable. Check the settings with the following procedure.

1 2 3 4

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Control Panel] - [Network and Internet Connection].
The [Network and Internet Connections] screen is displayed.

Select [Network connection].


The LAN or High-Speed Internet] screen is displayed.

Select [Advanced] menu - [Optional Networking Components].


The [Windows Optional Networking Components] screen is displayed.

Select [Other Network File and Print Services], then click the [Details] button.
The [Other Network File and Print Services] screen is displayed. If [Print Services for Unix] is not checked in the list, check that and add from the Windows setup CDROM.
For details on how to add a [Unix print services], refer to the copiers user's manual for the operating system.

Adding a LPD/LPR Printer Port and Installing a Printer Driver (PCL Driver)
This adds an LPD/LPR printer port and installs its printer driver.

1 2 3 4

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has installing rights such as a Power User.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From [My Computer], select the [CD-ROM] and then double click the [Setup. exe] in the [English] - [Printer] - [WinNT_2000_XP] folder.

396 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-5. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows XP

[Click the [OK] button.

The [Printer Driver Installer] screen is displayed.

Click the [Add a Port] tub.

Select the [LPR Port].

Input in the columns of [Post Description] and [Port Name], and [Add Port] button.

The[Add LPR compatible printer] screen is displayed.

397 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-5. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows XP

Enter the IP address assigned to the network controller in the column of [Name or address of server providing lpd].

10 11

Enter [printer] in small letters in the column of [Name of printer or print queen on that server] and click the [OK] button. Click the [OK] button.

12

Click the [Install a Driver] tub.

13

Set up the following items.

398 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-5. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows XP

[Printer Name]

Check the printer name. To change it, input a new printer name.

[Selecting the Printer Port]

Select the port to which the printer is connected.

[Install as the Default Printer]

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, check the [Install as the Default Printer] checkbox.

399 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

14-5. LPD/LPR Settings in Windows XP

14

When all the settings are complete, click the [Install] button.

15

Click the [Finished] button.

This completes printer driver installation.

400 V Network Print Settings Chapter 14 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

V Network Print Settings

Chapter 15 Using with NetWare

This chapter explains the settings required for using the network controller connected to a network using NetWare. The setting methods depend on the version of NetWare used, the resource management methods, etc. Refer to the pages appropriate to your system and make the necessary settings.

15-1. Print Controller NetWare Settings .................................................402 15-2. NetWare 3.x......................................................................................403 15-3. NetWare 4.x6..................................................................................404

401

15-1. Print Controller NetWare Settings


The network controller NetWare settings must be complete before the NetWare settings are made.
For details on the network controller NetWare settings, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

402

V Network Print Settings Chapter 15 Using with NetWare

15-2. NetWare 3.x


This section explains the setting method for NetWare 3.x.

Before Setting NetWare


The printer server name are set from the copier LCD screen [Network settings] or Web Utilities before the NetWare side settings are made.
For details on making the NetWare settings using the Web Utilities, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

NetWare Settings
The setting operations explained can be made only with super-user rights. For details on PCONSOLE and the concrete details of the operations described here, refer to the Novell NetWare users manual.

1 2 3 4 5

Start PCONSOLE and select the file server to use. Prepare and assign the print queue. Set the network controller as the printer server. Set the notice list/password as necessary. Set the primary file server as necessary.
If the primary file server on a large network connected to many sites including multiple file servers, it must be defined. Make the setting using PCONSOLE. For details on PCONSOLE, refer to the NetWare users manual.

When the above settings are complete, switch Off the print controller and copier power, wait 10 seconds, then switch the power back on. When you start the Copier with the default settings, the network setting list is printed. The file server the network controller is installed on, the service queue serviced by the file server, and other such information can be seen on this list.

After switching Off the copier main power, if you switch it back on without waiting, the print controller may not operate normally and errors may be displayed. In this case, if you switch the copier main power Off again, wait at least 10 seconds or so, then switch the main power On again, the system will operate normally.

403

V Network Print Settings Chapter 15 Using with NetWare

15-3. NetWare 4.x6


This section explains the setting method for NetWare 4.x6.

Features of NetWare 4.x6


Novell NetWare 4.x6 has two modes: Novell direct service (NDS) and bindery service emulation (bindery emulation). These two modes can be executed simultaneously. The printer server can be set to operate in either of these modes.

When NDS is not set correctly on the print server, if bindery service mode does not operate correctly, the print server card cannot recognize this file server. In this case, if you print the network setting list, the list will show that the Novell NetWare protocol is not active.

NDS (Novell Directory Service) NDS makes possible higher-level network control than previous versions of NetWare. NDS basically manages all integrated network objects. In principle, for NDS to operate, NDS must be loaded on all NetWare 4.x6 servers. Therefore, since each NetWare 4.x6 server services printing systems, print servers, print queues, and other specified directory objects, each server is a directory server. If you have the appropriate rights, you can prepare print server objects. Setting these objects in contexts on the network eliminates the need to setup printer servers on the network servers. NDS makes possible true enterprise networking based on shared network databases, not physical sites defined separately. This greatly improves the printer server setup and management efficiency.

404

V Network Print Settings Chapter 15 Using with NetWare

15-3. NetWare 4.x6


Bindery emulation NetWare 4.x6 maintains backward compatibility with 3.x6 print services through bindery simulation. When saving server/service, user, printing system, gateway, and other information, use the DIB (Directory Information Base). The DIB is a distributed database with which information saved anywhere can be accessed from anywhere on the network. The data for 6 and earlier versions of NetWare is also the same as that in the DIB. However, for those versions of NetWare, the information is stored in the NetWare bindery. DIB was designed for flexible accessibility and reliable security. It is divided into partitions for distribution. This directory uses an object-oriented structure rather than the flat file structure of bindery. This makes it possible to access the entire network rather than single servers. This directory realizes backward compatibility with NetWare bindery through bindery simulation. When bindery emulation is enabled, the directory service accepts bindery requests and responds to them as though there were a bindery on the NetWare server being accessed.
The directory is a distributed database divided into partitions. Therefore, the information acquired with bindery requests is sometimes not on the server accessed. NetWare 4.x6 servers do not operate with binderies, but the application making the bindery request cannot tell the difference.

405

V Network Print Settings Chapter 15 Using with NetWare

15-3. NetWare 4.x6

NDS Settings
NDS settings use the following utilities. Each has its own usage objective. Web Utilities Used for setting print server (network controller) context.
For details on the Web Utilities, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

Novell NWADMIN Used for preparing directory tree, print server, print system, and tree print queue objects.
The network controller is equipped to support the NetWare utilities (NWADMIN) just by being connected. Therefore, the NDS administrator can control from one point (print server centralized control). For details on NWADMIN, refer to the NetWare users manual

PCONSOLE With NetWare, PCONSOLE can be used instead of NWADMIN. PCONSOLE is used to set such static print server information as [which queue to service] and [who to notify if a problem occurs].
For details on NDS PCONSOLE, refer to the NetWare user's manual.

406

V Network Print Settings Chapter 15 Using with NetWare

15-3. NetWare 4.x6

Bindery Emulation Settings

This checks the bindery context.


Before connecting a printer server (network controller) to a bindery mode Novell NetWare 4.x6 server, check whether or not the NetWare server you are connecting to has a context. If no bindery context is set, the network administrator must execute the following operations. Revise the AUTOEXEC.NCF file to add the appropriate SET command, then restart the NetWare server. Input the SET command from the system console.

Console prompt commands take effect immediately but the autoexec.ncf file definitions do not take effect until the server is restarted.

When you have checked that the file server has the bindery context, use PCONSOLE to set the network controller.
For details on PCONSOLE, refer to the NetWare users manual.

When using bindery mode, only uppercase letters are valid for the NetWare server password.

407

V Network Print Settings Chapter 15 Using with NetWare

V Network Print Settings

Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

This chapter explains how to use IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) to print data received via the Internet or an intranet and the settings required for using IPP.

16-1. Internet Printing ..............................................................................409 16-2. Printer Settings ...............................................................................410 16-3. Windows 2000 Settings ..................................................................411 16-4. Windows XP Settings .....................................................................417

408

16-1. Internet Printing


This printing system supports Internet printing using IPP (Internet Printing Protocol). Internet printing is a printing technology that exchanges print data between a computer and printer at physically separate locations over the Internet or an intranet. If you are connected over the Internet or an intranet, you can print with print instructions sent from a computer at a site remote from the printer. With Internet printing, the printer can be used like a fax.
Internet printing can only be executed on computers running Windows 2000/XP as their operating system.

Router HUB

Internet

HUB Router Printer (Copier)

IPP is a standardized protocol for sending and receiving print data over the Internet or an intranet. IPP is a protocol based on HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) and can send/receive data through firewalls, so it makes possible print instructions via the Internet.

409

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-2. Printer Settings


This section explains the printer settings required for Internet printing.

Printing System TCP/IP Settings


To use the Internet printing functions, the network controller TCP/IP and IPP settings must be complete.
For details on making the network controller TCP/IP settings, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

IPP Attribute Settings


The IPP attributes are set as necessary. The IPP attributes are the name, installation location, and other information concerning the printer used for Internet printing. Pre-registering the IPP attributes makes it possible to check the information concerning the printer used for Internet printing from a remote site via the Internet.
For details on IPP attributes and how to set them, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

410

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-3. Windows 2000 Settings


This section explains how to make internet printing settings with Windows 2000.
To execute Internet printing, it is necessary that the computer TCP/IP settings be complete, that the computer be able to connect to the Internet, and that the printer be connected to the Intranet.

1 2 3 4

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights incorporating those of a Power User.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

411

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-3. Windows 2000 Settings

Click the [Next ] button.

Select [Network printer].

8 9

Ensure that the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play Printer] checkbox is not checked.

Click the [Next ] button.


[Locate Your Printer] screen is displayed.

Select [Connect to a printer on the Internet or on your intranet].

For the printer IP address section, input the IP address allocated to the network controller. For details on network controller IP address, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations]. If the DNS (Domain Name System) is set, the printer (network controller) host name can also be set. For details on DNS settings, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

412

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-3. Windows 2000 Settings

10

Input the output printer's URL at [URL].


Input as follows.

http://printer IP address:631/ipp
For the Pritner IP address section, input the IP address allocated to the network controller.

When a proxy is set with the Web browser, the printer cannot be accessed. For details on proxy settings, check with your network administrator.

11 12

Click the [Next ] button.


The [Connect to Printer] screen is displayed.

Check the [OK] button.

A screen to confirm the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.

13

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

14

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

413

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-3. Windows 2000 Settings

15

From [Look in], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\Printer\WinNT_2000_XP] folder.

[Printer] is displayed as the [File name].

16 17

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

18

Ensure that [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] is displayed selected in [Printer], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen to confirm the printer name is displayed.

414

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-3. Windows 2000 Settings

19

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

20 21 22 23 24

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No]. Check the [Next ] button.
The screen to confirm whether or not the printer is shared is displayed.

To share the printer, select [Share as]; to not share it, select [Do not share this printer].
To assign a share name to the printer, input the Share name.

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed checking whether or not you want to print a test print.

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

The test print prints the standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in the [Properties]. ( Page 46)

415

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-3. Windows 2000 Settings

25 26

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed announcing that the [Add Printer Wizard] is complete.

Click the [Finish] button.

The [Digital Signature Not Found] screen is displayed.

27

Click the [Yes] button.

The printer driver is installed on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

28

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [OK] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] screen. This completes printer driver installation.
If the test page is not printed correctly, refer to [Test Page Cannot Be Printed.] ( Page 111)

416

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-4. Windows XP Settings


This section explains how to make internet printing settings with Windows XP.
To execute Internet printing, it is necessary that the computer TCP/IP settings be complete, that the computer be able to connect to the Internet, and that the printer be connected to the Intranet.

1 2 3 4

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights incorporating those of a Power User or the like.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

417

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-4. Windows XP Settings

Select [Printer task] - [Add a printer].

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

Click the [Next ] button.

Select [A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer].

Ensure that the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer] checkbox is not checked.

Click the [Next ] button.


The [Specify a Printer] screen is displayed.

418

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-4. Windows XP Settings

Select [Connect to a printer on the Internet or on a home or office network].

10

Input the output printer URL at [URL].


Input as follows.

http://printer IP address:631/ipp
For the "Printer IP address section", input the IP address allocated to the network controller. For details on network controller IP address, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations]. If the DNS (Domain Name System) is set, the printer (network controller) host name can also be set. For details on DNS settings, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

When a proxy is set with the Web browser, the printer cannot be accessed. For details on proxy settings, check with your network administrator.

11 12

Click the [Next ] button.


The [Install Printer Software] screen is displayed.

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

419

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-4. Windows XP Settings

13

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

14

From [Look in], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\ Printer\WinNT_2000_XP] folder.

[Printer.inf] is displayed as the [File name].

15 16

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

420

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-4. Windows XP Settings

17

Ensure that [KONICA MINOLTA xxxx/IP-xxx] is displayed selected in [Printers], then click the [Next ] button.

The [Name Your Printer] screen is displayed.

18

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

19 20

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No]. Click the [Next ] button.
A screen is displayed checking whether or not you want to print a test print.

421

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-4. Windows XP Settings

21

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

Test prints can also be executed in the [Properties]. (

Page 80)

22 23

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed announcing that the [Add Printer Wizard] is complete.

Click the [Finish] button.

The [Hardware Installation] screen is displayed.

24

Click the [Continue Anyway] button.

The printer driver is installed on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

422

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

16-4. Windows XP Settings

25

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [OK] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers and Faxes] screen. This completes printer driver installation.
If the test page is not printed correctly, refer to [Test Page Cannot Be Printed.] ( Page 111)

423

V Network Print Settings Chapter 16 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

V Network Print Settings

Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration

This section explains how to configure the network interface card and your network for use with TCP/IP communication in various UNIX environments. Independent setup and installation procedures are provided for most popular UNIX systems.

17-1. UNIX Printing through TCP/IP ........................................................425 17-2. Printing Overview............................................................................426 17-3. lpd UNIX Printing.............................................................................427

424

17-1. UNIX Printing through TCP/IP


The TCP/IP capability of the printing system will also operate with lpr spoolers on other systems, and with spooler/supervisor capabilities that communicate raw print jobs to the TCP/IP port of the network interface card. This port number is 9100.

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a protocol for network management services. SNMP is supported for Management Information Base (MIB) II over the IP for the printing system. This support allows you to query MIB II to get system information about the printing system.

The printing system can support UNIX TCP/IP printing in two modes: Host-based where a supplied line printer daemon is run on one or more workstations and print data is communicated to the printing system via a TCP/IP port. Printer-based lpd where the print controller appears as a host running a line printer daemon. Many operating systems provide the option of using host-resident printing or printer-resident printing. In general, printer-based lpd is easier to use on BSD UNIX systems. This requires an entry in the printcap file once the printing system has its IP information. Some UNIX System V systems have restrictions on support of remote lpd printers, requiring that the host-based lpd approach be used. Each printing mode has certain advantages over the other mode, as follows: The host-resident method can print the username and filename on its banner page; whereas the printer-resident method prints a banner page with the host's name. The printer-resident method requires you to configure the printing system only one time, when you install the printing system; whereas, the host-resident method requires that a printing daemon be installed on every host that you want to be able to print jobs.

The printing system will also operate with other host-resident print supervisor/spooler programs that present a print image to the print controller over a TCP/IP port.

425

V Network Print Settings Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration

17-2. Printing Overview


Considering both the host-based and printer-based TCP/IP printing capabilities, the printing system works with the following systems: All UNIX systems that support lpd System V Rel. 4 (on 386 platforms) DEC ULTRIX RISC Versions 4.3 and 4.4 DEC OSF/1 Versions 2.0 and 3.0 Solaris: Version 1.1.3 (SunOS 4.1.3), Version 2.3 (SunOS 5.3), Version 2.4, and Version 2 HP-UX Series 700 and 800 Version 9.01 and Version 10 IBM AIX Version 3.2.5 and Version 4.0 SCO UNIX Version 3.2 AS400

426

V Network Print Settings Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration

17-3. lpd UNIX Printing


lpd is an implementation of the standard UNIX line printer daemon that lets you print across a TCP/IP network without the need to install software on your workstation, with all filtering and banners done by the printing system. Remote printing uses the same commands (lpr, lpq, lpc) as local printing. The process begins when the lpr call finds the printer on a remote system by looking at the remote (rm) entry in the /etc/printcap file for that printer. lpr handles a print job for a remote printer by opening a connection with the lpd process on the remote system and sending the data file (followed by the control file containing control information for this job) to the remote system. The printer-based lpd then filters the data and prints the job according to information contained in the control file and its own printcap file. The network interface card lpd recognizes the format of a certain printer emulation and filters the data, if possible, so it can be printed on the printer you specify. You can indicate to the printing system lpd what type of print controller it is attached to by either: Accepting the default port setting (PCL5e, PostScript and other), or Changing the listed emulations via a standard IP based Web Browser. The sections that follow give specific lpd setup instructions for various systems.

Setting Up a BSD Remote Printer to Use lpd


To set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to the printing system using printer resident lpd, add an entry to the /etc/printcap file on your host for each printer you use. Perform the following procedure:

Open the /etc/printcap file.


Make an entry naming the printing system as the remote host and printer as the remote printer name. A typical printcap entry is as follows: <printer_name>\ (for example, lprprinter) :lp=:\ :rm=<remote_host>:\ (for example, name as entered in /etc/hosts) :rp=printer:\ :sd=/usr/spool/lpd/<printer_name>: (for example, spool directory on system used to spool data and control files) This entry will send jobs spooled at /usr/spool/lpd/<printer_name> to the printer designated <printer_name> to be printed at printer (the internal connection to the printer) of the printing system designated as <remote_host>.

Create the spooling directory. For example, type:


mkdir /usr/spool/lpd/<printer_name>

427

V Network Print Settings Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration

17-3. lpd UNIX Printing

To print via the spooler, use the lpr command. Type:


lpr-P <printer_name> < file_name> Installation and testing are done. You are now ready to print.

Setting Up an AIX Version 2.5 Remote Printer to Use lpd


Use the following procedure to set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to the printing system using the lpd of the printing system.

1 2 3 4 5 6

At the prompt, type:


#smit spooler <cr>

When a window appears, select [Manage Remote Printers]. When a menu appears, select [Client Services]. Another menu appears, select [Remote Printer Queues]. Another menu appears, select [Add a Remote Queue]. When a window appears, change the values shown to configure the printing system.
The values displayed are default values. You must replace the short and long form filter values with the values shown in the following table. Data Requested Example Name of queue to add print1 queue Destination Host printfast Short Form Filter /usr/lpd/bsdshort Long Form Filter /usr/lpd/bsdlong Name of remote printer queue printer Name of device to add print1 Data Description Name of local printer NIC IP hostname Required value Required value Network interface card Name of local queue

After you have supplied all values, press Enter.


You can now print.

428

V Network Print Settings Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration

17-3. lpd UNIX Printing

Setting Up an AIX 4.0 System


Use these procedures to install the printing system in a AIX 4.0 system:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Run SMIT Printer. Select [Print Spooling]. Select [Add a Print Queue]. Select [Remote]. Use [Standard Processing]. Assign a queue name. Use the host address of the printing system for the Remote System. Use [printer] for the queue on the remote system. Add a description (optional). Press [Enter] to generate.
Installation is complete. Test your printer by executing the following command: lp -d<queue_name> <file_name>

429

V Network Print Settings Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration

17-3. lpd UNIX Printing

Setting Up an HP-UX Remote Printer to Use lpd


Set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to the printing system using the lpd of the printing system. To do this:

1 2 3 4 5 6

At the prompt, type:


sam

When a window appears, select [Printer/Plotter Manager]. When the menu appears, select [List printer and plotters]. When a list appears, select [Actions] in the title bar. From the pull-down menu, select [Add Remote Printer]. When a window appears, add values to configure the printing system.
See example below. Data Requested Printer Name Remote System Name Remote printer Example myprinter fastprint Description of Input Data name to be used in lp command Network Interface Card hostname as in /etc/hosts Name printer lpd queue name

7 8 9 10 11

At the bottom of the screen, select [Remote Printer is on BSD system] from the three choices available. Click on the OK button. Ping the unit to test communications. Type:
ping <IP address of the network interface card>

Ping should confirm your IP address with the message:


<IP address of the printing system> is alive

If the connection is confirmed, you can now print.

430

V Network Print Settings Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration

17-3. lpd UNIX Printing

Setting Up an AS/400 System to Use lpd


When working with the output queue description (WORKOUTQD), there are several fields that must be defined for the printing system to function properly as a remote printer device. Use the following procedure to define fields for the printing system to make it function as a remote printer:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

When prompted for the remote system, type INTNETADR so the AS/400 recognizes the device as an IP device. Port must be [printer]. Connection type must be [IP]. Internet address must be the IP address of the printing system. Destination type must be [OTHER]. When prompted for transforming SCS to ASCII, type YES to allow the AS/400 do the character translation. Manufacturer type and model must be the print driver that goes with your print controller.

431

V Network Print Settings Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration

17-3. lpd UNIX Printing

Setting Up a DEC ULTRIX 4.3 RISC or OSF1 Remote Printer


Use the following procedure to set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to the printing system.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

At the prompt, type: lprsetup, then select [add]. Enter a name for your printer, then press [Enter]. "Do you want more information on specific printer types?" Press Enter. A list of ULTRIX-supported printers is listed. Type: remote, and press [Enter]. Enter a printer synonym (alias) and press [Enter]. Designate a spooler directory and press [Enter], or accept the default spooler directory displayed and press [Enter]. Designate a remote system name and press [Enter]. Designate printer as the remote system printer name and press [Enter]. You are asked to enter the name of a printcap symbol from a displayed list. Type: Q, and press [Enter]. Your configuration is displayed.
You are asked whether these values are final. Type: Y or N, and press Enter. An example is shown below. Printer #7 Symbol lp (line printer) rm (remote host) rp (remote printer) sd (spooler directory) Type STR STR STR STR Representative Value printing system_host printer /usr/spool/lpd7

11 12

Add comments to the printcap file. For example, you can type:
Lois' printer down the hall <Enter>

Select exit to save your configuration, then press [Enter]. You are now prepared to print.

432

V Network Print Settings Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration

17-3. lpd UNIX Printing

Setting Up a SCO UNIX Remote Printer to Use lpd


Use the following procedure to set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to the printing system using lpd.

At the prompt, enter the mkdev rlp command.

You cannot run mkdev rlp twice. If you have additional printers to be configured, use the rlpconf command.

You are now asked a series of questions. Respond as follows (shown in bold type):
Please enter a printer name: lprprinter1 Is lprprinter1 a remote printer or a local printer? R Enter remote host name: lprprinter Confirm the information you entered: Y Confirm the preceding connection as your system default: Y Enter another printer name or quit setup: Q

3 4

If necessary, stop and restart your remote daemon. Using a line editor of your choice, edit the /etc/printcap file and change the:
rp=entry to printer.

433

V Network Print Settings Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration

17-3. lpd UNIX Printing

Setting Up System V Release 4 and Solaris 2.X to Use lpd


If your system recognizes the LPSYSTEM command, you do not need to install the dedicated utility, KONICA MINOLTA's host-side software. Another option is the admintool if your system supports it. LPSYSTEM Installation The following procedure must be executed from the Bourne Shell. Type: SH then press Enter to enter the Bourne Shell program. Use the following procedures to install LPSYSTEM:

1 2 3 4

lpsystem -t bsd < Print server host name in /etc/hosts file > lpadmin -p <local printername> -s <remote host name or IP address> !printer
Your system may want its IP address instead of the remote host name.

Enable <local printername> Accept <local printername>

434

V Network Print Settings Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration

17-3. lpd UNIX Printing

Printing on Linux

1 2 3 4 5

Start x terminal. At the command prompt, enter the printtool command.


The Red Hat Print System Manager window opens.

Click the Add button.


The Add Printer Entry window opens.

Choose Remote Unix (lpd) Queue and click OK .


The Edit Remote Unix Queue Entry window opens.

Specify the following:


The printer name The spooler directory (typically, /usr/spool/lpd/prntr-name) The IP address of the printing system (in the Remote Host field) printer (in In the Remote Queue field) An input filter (optional) When you finish, click OK.

Restart the daemon by choosing lpd -> Restart lpd in the Print Server Manager.

435

V Network Print Settings Chapter 17 UNIX Configuration

V Network Print Settings

Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

This chapter explains the settings required for connecting to a network using AppleTalk and printing from a Macintosh.

18-1. Preliminary Procedure for Using with AppleTalk.........................437 18-2. Network Controller AppleTalk Settings ........................................438 18-3. Macintosh Settings .........................................................................439 18-4. Installing a Printer Driver ...............................................................440

436

18-1. Preliminary Procedure for Using with AppleTalk


The Macintosh and network controller are prepared with the following procedure.

1 2 3 4

An IP address is assigned to the network controller.


Refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

The copier control panel or Web utility is used to make the network controller AppleTalk settings.
Refer to [18-2.Network Controller AppleTalk Settings],( Page 438).

The Macintosh is set.


Refer to [18-3.Macintosh Settings],( Page 439).

The [printer driver] is installed.


Refer to [18-4.Installing a Printer Driver], ( Page 440).

437

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-2. Network Controller AppleTalk Settings


The network controller is set as follows to print with a printer using AppleTalk. AppleTalk usage Set the network controller [Use AppleTalk] - [Yes].
For details on making the [Use AppleTalk] setting, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

Printer name settings This sets the copier (network controller) name (printer name) displayed on the AppleTalk network.
For details on the [Printer name] setting, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

Zone name setting This sets the name of the [Zone] to which the print controller is connected in the AppleTalk network.
For details on setting the [Zone name], refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

438

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-3. Macintosh Settings


The TCP/IP and AppleTalk settings are made with the Macintosh from which you will print.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

From the [Apple] menu, select [Control panels] - [TCP/IP].


The [TCP/IP] screen is displayed.

As [Connect via], select [AppleTalk (Mac IP)].


The AppleTalk settings screen is displayed.

Check that the [Configure] is set to [Using Mac IP server]. As [Connect via], select [Ethernet ].
The Ethernet settings screen is displayed.

Select the [Configure] items corresponding to the settings for the network the Macintosh is connected to and set the IP address, subnet mask, etc.
For details on network settings, consult your network administrator.

Click the close button at the top left of the screen.


The [Save changes to current configuration] message is displayed.

Click the [Save] button.


The AppleTalk and Ethernet settings are saved.

439

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-4. Installing a Printer Driver


The Adobe PostScript driver is installed from the PostScript option User software CD onto the Macintosh you will print from. For a Power Macintosh with Mac OS 8.x or higher up to version 9.x. Refer to the user software CD [English] - [Driver] - [OS8_x to 9_x] folder. For Mac OS X v10.2x Refer to the user software CD [English] - [Driver] - [OS X] folder.
For details on the installation, refer to [Mac OS X v10.2x Version Installation] ( page 443).

The printer driver is not installable on Mac OS v10.0 or v10.1.

After installing the printer driver, it is recommended to re-start the computer. If Adobe PostScript has been installed before the driver for this printing system is installed, that version is overwritten by the Adobe PostScript that comes with this printing system.

440

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-4. Installing a Printer Driver

Mac OS 8.x or higher up to version 9.x Instllation

Switch on the power for the Macintosh and start the Mac OS.
Close down any applications that are running.

2 3 4

Put the PostScript option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. Double click the [English] - [Driver] folder on the user software CD. Double click [OS8_x to 9_x], then select [koxxxxx.ppd] and copy to the computers [HDD] [System Folder] - [Expansions] - [Printer Descriptions].

In the folder where the user software CD printer driver is stored, double-click [Adobe PS Installer].

The [Adobe PostScript Driver] screen is displayed.

Click the [Continue] button.

The [License] screen is displayed.

441

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-4. Installing a Printer Driver

Click the [Accept] button.

[Adobe PostScript English-language installer] screen is displayed.

Click the [Install] button.

Install the printer driver on the computer. When the installation is complete, a message is displayed.

Click the [Restart] button.

442

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-4. Installing a Printer Driver

Mac OS X v10.2x Version Installation

The printer driver is not installable on Mac OS v10.0 or v10.1.

1 2

Power ON PC and startup Macintosh. Setup [User Software CD] on PC CD-ROM drive.
Close all running application, if any.

3 4 5

From [User Software CD] - [English], double-click [Driver] folder. Select [IP-xxxPrinting.pkg] and copy it onto desktop. Double-click on [IP-xxxPrinting.pkg].

[Welcome to the KONICA MINOLTA Printer Driver Installer] screen appears.

When the system prompts to enter the name and password of the administrator, enter the name and password of the administrator.

Clicking the [Cancel] button at this point exits the installer. For information about the name and password of the administrator, consult the system administrator.

443

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-4. Installing a Printer Driver

Click the [Continue] button.

[Important Information] screen appears.

Click the [Continue] button.

[Software License Agreement] screen appears.

Click the [Continue] button.

10

Click the [Agree] button.

[Select a Destination] screen appears.

444

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-4. Installing a Printer Driver

11

Select a disk to be installed and then click the [Continue] button.

[Easy Install] screen appears.

12

Click the [Install] button.

Printer driver will be installed on PC. When the installation completes, a message appears.
When reinstallation is carried out, the indication [Install] may be changed to [Upgrade].

13

Click the [Close] button.

The printer driver is installed now.

445

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-4. Installing a Printer Driver

Selecting the Printer


Mac OS 8.x or higher up to version 9.x
When you select the printer to use with [Chooser], you can use the printer.

Select [Apple] Menu - [Chooser].

The [Chooser] screen is displayed.

Check that [AppleTalk] is set to [Active], then click the [AdobePS] icon.

Click the printer name applicable to the printing system from the [Select a PostScript Printer] list, and click the [Setup] button.

The selection screen for the Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is displayed.
The indication [Setup] may be changed to [Create] may be displayed.

446

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-4. Installing a Printer Driver

Click the applicable PPD file and click the [Select] button.

The additional option setting screen is displayed.

Click the [ ] button for each item to set the options installed on the copier.

For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

6 7

Click the [OK] button. The display returns to the [Selector] screen. Close the [Chooser] screen.

447

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-4. Installing a Printer Driver

Mac OS X v10.2x
[Print Center] enables you to select a printer you want to use.

From installed [HDD] - [Applications] - [Utilities], double-click on [Print Center].

Click the [Add] button.

If the applicable printer is set, the illustration of 2 is not displayed.

Select the corresponding printer name.

448

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-4. Installing a Printer Driver

Click [Printer Model] and select [KONICA MINOLTA].

Select the model name to be used and then click the [Add] button.

The selected printer is registered to [Printer List].

From Menu - [Printers], select [Show Info].

[Printer Info] screen will be displayed.

449

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

18-4. Installing a Printer Driver

Select [Installable Options].

Setup the options that are equipped to copier.

10

Click the [Apply Changes] button.

11

Close [Print Info] screen.

450

V Network Print Settings Chapter 18 Use with AppleTalk

V Network Print Settings

Chapter 19 When There Is Network Printing Trouble

This chapter explains the causes of problems that can affect networks and network equipment and how to solve those problems.

19-1. Troubleshooting Network Hardware Connections.......................452 19-2. NetWare Protocol Troubleshooting...............................................453

451

19-1. Troubleshooting Network Hardware Connections


Check the network cables. Check that the 100Base-TX or 10Base-TX network cable connector is connected to the RJ45 connectors on the network controller. Replace the network cable to see if the problem is the cable.

452

V Network Print Settings Chapter 19 When There Is Network Printing Trouble

19-2. NetWare Protocol Troubleshooting


It is recommended that you execute Web utility and check the NetWare setup and parameters. If executing Web utility did not solve the problem, check the following items.

NetWare Check Items


Is the print server registered correctly? The factory default name is [KC-(serial number)]. The print server name is written in the network settings list. Is a print queue assigned under the network setting menu? It is recommended that each print queue be assigned to one printing system connected to the network controller. If the print queue assigned to the printing system connected to the network controller is also assigned to another network printer, print jobs may be output on the other network printer. If the PCONSOLE or NWADMIN settings are correct, it is possible that the connection between the printer itself and the network is cut. Switch Off the print controller and the printer itself, then use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN to wait for the [Not Connected] status message. When you switch the print controller and printer itself back On, the status changes to [Waiting].

File Server Check Items


Does the file server have adequate disk capacity? Is it operating? Is the correct file server related to the printing system? Use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN to check the relationship. Do you have the appropriate rights (super-user/administrator rights) to set the print controller? Are the file server and network controller communicating with each other? To check these communications, execute the NetWare COM-CHECK utility from any workstation. Are you logged onto the file server with the appropriate user rights?

453

V Network Print Settings Chapter 19 When There Is Network Printing Trouble

19-2. NetWare Protocol Troubleshooting

Workstation Check Items


Can the workstation connect to the network? For details, refer to the NetWare users manual. Is the application set up for printing with the network setting menu? Is the correct driver being used? Is the workstation connected to the correct print queue? Print and check that the workstation is connected to the correct print queue. Is the print queue assigned to the printing system connected to the network controller assigned to another printer too? In this case, jobs may be output on the other printer. Are jobs active? Are jobs printed? Use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN to register a sample job directly to the assigned queue. Is AUTO ENDCAP enabled? If AUTO ENDCAP is enabled, data is output on the network printer. Use PRINTCON to check AUTO ENDCAP. If AUTO ENDCAP is disabled, enable it.

Setting Check Items


If all the hardware connections are good, check the following points. Use Web utility to check the printer server status. The printer status screen shows the status of the selected print server. The file server status, error contents, and the queue assigned to the network controller are displayed. It is possible that the printing system is not assigned to a valid print queue. To send the print job to a valid queue, use CONSOLE or NWADMIN. Then, check that the print job is in the destination queue. If there is a changed or new network controller, use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN to check that it is set correctly. Check that the printer server name is correctly input [KC- (serial number)]. When the name is changed, always change the name with PCONSOLE or NWADMIN too to enable that setting. Use PCONSOLE Version 1.0 or later to check the printer status. When upgrading PCONSOLE, ask Novell.

454

V Network Print Settings Chapter 19 When There Is Network Printing Trouble

19-2. NetWare Protocol Troubleshooting

Print Server/File Server/Printer Check Items


If the network controller cannot log onto the file server or cannot process jobs from the file server, check the following. Ensure if the network controller is set for the file server. If it not set, set it using PCONSOLE or NWADMIN. The password assigned to the network controller through PCONSOLE or NWADMIN must match the password assigned through Web utility. If you change the password stored in the network controller memory, use Web utility. Ensure that the print job is in the print queue and that it is waiting for printing. To check that print jobs are sent to the network controller, use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN.

Work Station and Network Controller Connection Check Items


To check that the work station and the network controller are communicating with each other, check the following. Print a file from the work station and use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN to check that the print job reaches the print queue. If printing is possible, the problem is not in the connection between the work station and the network controller. When sending data from a work station software application to the printing system, use CAPTURE. Refer to the NetWare print server manual. Check that no other printer is taking the print job from the queue before the network controller processes it. Disable other printers until you have checked the setup of the printing system to which the network controller is connected.

When the Connection between the Network Controller and the Novell File Server Is Cut
If the connection between the network controller and the file server is cut, reconnection takes about 5-10 minutes. If the connection is not re-established after that long, it is necessary to troubleshoot the error.

455

V Network Print Settings Chapter 19 When There Is Network Printing Trouble

VI Appendix
This volume covers the product specifications and basic troubleshooting.

Chapter 20 Troubleshooting............. 457 Chapter 21 Appendix......................... 460

456

VI Appendix

Chapter 20 Troubleshooting

This chapter explains solutions for when trouble occurs during use of this equipment. If the methods explained here do not solve the problem, contact your service representative.

20-1. When Trouble Occurs in this Printing System .............................458

457

20-1. When Trouble Occurs in this Printing System


If trouble occurs in this printing system, first check the following basic elements.

Check that the printing system is correctly functioning.


Check that the copier and computer power are on and that the cables are correctly connected. Check the contents of the problem for the information displayed on the control panel LCD screen. If possible, print a [Test Page] and check the contents of the current settings.
For information on the method for printing the test Page, refer to [Checking Printing] ( Page 99).

Check the print controller status.


This checks the current status of the control panel LCD screen. On the LCD screen, touch the [JOB LIST] to check the status of jobs.

Checking from the computer


For Windows, you can check the status of printing instructions executed from the computer using the following procedure.

With the computer from which the printing was executed, select taskbar [Start] - [Settings] [Printers]. The printer screen is displayed. Double-click the icon for the print controller driver. The print status screen is displayed. If there is a job being processed or not yet output, information about it is displayed in the screen. If possible, print a list of the network settings. If it was possible to print this list, check which protocol can be used and whether or not it is operating.
For details on a list of the network settings, refer to the copier users manual [Network Setup and Scanner Operations].

4 5

Check if other users can print. If other users using the same network OS cannot print either, refer to the Windows user's manual. Switch off the main power for the copier, wait about 10 seconds, then switch the power back on again. If this does not solve the problem, refer to [Chapter 19 When There Is Network Printing Trouble] ( Page 451) and check the cause of the problem.

458

VI Appendix Chapter 20 Troubleshooting

20-1. When Trouble Occurs in this Printing System

After switching Off the Copier main power, if you switch it back on without waiting, the print controller may not operate normally and errors may be displayed. In this case, if you switch the Copier main power Off again, wait at least 10 seconds or so, then switch the main power On again, the system will operate normally.

459

VI Appendix Chapter 20 Troubleshooting

VI Appendix

Chapter 21 Appendix

This appendix contains such information as the print controller product specifications and a list of installed fonts. It also explains the printer driver function list, and other such information.

21-1. IP-432 Product Specifications........................................................461 21-2. IP-424 Product Specifications........................................................463 21-3. PostScript PS-344 Option Product Specifications.......................465 21-4. PostScript PS-346 Option Product Specifications.......................465 21-5. Options.............................................................................................466 21-6. Function List....................................................................................470 21-7. Fonts ................................................................................................484 21-8. Font Number List (Control Panel-PCL Setup) ..............................500 21-9. Symbol Sets List (Control Panel-PCL Setup) ...............................503 21-11. Index According to Item ...............................................................508 21-12. Purpose-Oriented Index ...............................................................511

460

21-1. IP-432 Product Specifications


Printer Function
Type Paper Built into KONICA MINOLTA 7145 series copier U.S.A 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x 11, 8.5x11R, 5.5x8.5, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, F4 Europe 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x 11, 8.5x11R, 5.5x8.5, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, F4, 16K, 16KR, 8K Same as copier Same as copier Copier/printer dual operation possible (A maximum of five jobs can be processed.) Duplex printing, media type selection, output tray selection, print quality mode selection, alternating printing Staple function, punch function, front cover and back cover function, password print, etc. Vertical (portrait), horizontal (landscape) Printer resolution: 600 dpi Binary 1 to 999 Top/bottom/left/right margins 4.0mm Same as copier Intel Celeron 300A FLASH ROM (compact flash)16MB SD-RAM64MB (standard) Option: MU-404 64MB MU-405 128MB Parallel port Centronics (IEEE1284)/Amphenol 36-pin male connector Windows 95/98/Me Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Mac OS 8.x or higher up to version 9.x (when PostScript option installed) Mac OS X v10.2 or higher (when PostScript option installed) Windows 95/98/Me printer drivers Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP printer drivers Mac OS 8.x or higher up to version 9.x (when PostScript option installed) Mac OS X v10.2 or higher (when PostScript option installed)

Paper input/ output amounts Paper output capacity Mode Special printing

Print direction Resolution Number of tones Number of print setting sheets Printable area Warm up CPU Program memory System memory

Interface Operating Systems supported

Printer driver

461

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-1. IP-432 Product Specifications

PC-FAX Function
Transmission standards Modem speeds Encoding formats Transmission time Super G3 33,600/31,200/28,800/26,400/24,000/21,600/19,200/16,800/14,400/12,000/9,600/ 7,200/4,800/2,400bps MH/MR/MMR/JBIG 2-second level This is the transmission time for JBIG communications for at A4-size document containing approximately 700 characters send at standard quality (8x3.85 lines/mm) in super G3 mode (ITU-T V.34, 28.8 bps or faster). A3 maximum (Maximum document length 800 meters) A3 maximum Main scanning 16/8 lines/mm Secondary scanning 15.4/7.7/3.85 lines/mm 200x200 dpi, 400x400 dpi (super fine) Possible when option installed 500 numbers 40 numbers 600 maximum

Communication size Recording paper size Scan line density Resolution PC-Fax transmission/ reception Quick dialing Program dialing Sequential broadcast transmission

462

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-2. IP-424 Product Specifications


Printer Function
Type Paper Paper input/ Output amounts Paper output capacity Mode Special printing Built into KONICA MINOLTA 7222/7322/7228/7235 copiers A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, B6, postcard, Letter(8.5x11), Letter R(11x8.5), Tabloid(11x14), Legal(8.5x14), Statement(5.5x8.5) Same as copier Same as copier Copier/printer dual operation possible (A maximum five jobs can be processed.) Dual side printing, media type selection, output tray selection, print quality mode selection, alternating printing Staple function, front cover and back-cover function, password print, etc. Vertical (portrait), horizontal (landscape) Printer resolution: 600dpi Binary 1 to 999 Top/bottom/left/right margins 4.0mm Same as copier NS Geode GX-1300MHz FLASH ROM (compact flash)32MB SD-RAM128MB (standard) expandable Parallel port Centronics (IEEE 1284)/Amphenol 36-pin male connector USB port Windows 95/98/Me Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Mac OS 8.x or higher to Version 9.x (when the PostScript option is installed) Mac OS X x10.2x (when the PsotScript option is installed) Windows 95/98/Me printer drivers Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP printer drivers Mac OS 8.x or higher to Version 9.x (when the PostScript option is installed) Mac OS X v10.2x (when the PostScript option is installed)

Print direction Resolution Gradations Number of print setting sheets Printable area Warm up CPU Program memory System memory Interfaces (on the copier) Operating Systems suppoted

Printer driver

463

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-2. IP-424 Product Specifications

PC-FAX Function
Transmission standards Modem speeds Encoding formats Transmission time Super G3 33,600/31,200/28,800/26,400/24,000/21,600/19,200/16,800/14,400/12,000/9,600/ 7,200/4,800/2,400bps MH/MR/MMR/JBIG 2-second level Transmission time for sending a A4 size paper containing approximately 700 characters with the standard picture quality i8x3.85 line/mmjin the Super G3 mode (in compliance with ITU- T V.34, 28.8 bps or higher) by JBIG communications. A3 maximum (Maximum document length 800 meters) A3 maximum Main scanning: 16/8 lines per mm Secondary scanning 15.4/7.7/3.85 lines/mm 200x200 dpi, 400x400 dpi (super fine) Possible when option installed. 500 numbers 40 numbers 600 maximum

Communication size Recording paper size Scan line density Resolution PC-Fax transmission/ reception Quick dialing Program dialing Sequential broadcast transmission

464

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-3. PostScript PS-344 Option Product Specifications


This section gives the PostScript option product specifications.
Type Number of print setting sheets Program memory Operating Systems supported Built into print controller 1 to 999 (Windows 95/98/Me), 1 to 9999 (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP, Macintosh) FLASH ROM (compact flash)32MB Windows 95/98/Me Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Mac OS 8.x to 9.x Mac OS X v10.2x

21-4. PostScript PS-346 Option Product Specifications


This section gives the PostScript option product specifications.
Type Number of print setting sheets Program memory Operating Systems supported Built into print controller 1 to 999 (Windows 95/98/Me), 1 to 9999 (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP, Macintosh) FLASH ROM (compact flash) 32MB (shared with IP-424) Windows 95/98/Me Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Mac OS 8.x to 9.x Mac OS X v10.2x

465

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-5. Options
This section contains information on memory, hard disks, and other options.

Memory (IP-432 only)


Almost all the memory installed in the print controller is used for image rasterizing (bitmap development processing), font cache, form function, and other processing. Part is used for system operation. The basic memory setting for the print controller is 64 MB, which makes printing in 1-bit mode (600 dpi) possible for all sizes of paper. The larger the capacity of the memory in the print controller, the more pages can be rasterized while waiting for earlier jobs in the queue to print. For A4 size paper, printing 1-bit mode data uses about 4,345 KB of memory (600 dpi). Also, the copier's E-RDH memory is used for print processing. The E-RDH memory can be expanded to up to 320 MB.

E-RDH (Electronic Recirculating Document Handler) memory


The E-RDH is a system that stores print data temporarily in the copier main unit memory (E-RDH memory) and processes it according to the selected settings. When printing from the print controller, the copier main unit E-RDH is used. The copiers E-RDH memory is 64 MB standard and can be expanded to up to 320MB. The print controller uses 1-bit mode. It can hold approximately 360 pages of A4 data in the 64 MB (standard) of E-RDH memory. Under conditions such as the following, because the print controller does not have adequate memory installed, the desired print results cannot be obtained. When error dispersion (normal fine or fine) is specified with the printer driver, if the data is complex, image processing is switched automatically to dither and so printed. When form data is complicated (the file sizes large), the form is not printed. In the above cases, it is recommended that the print controller's memory be expanded. Also, when printing specifying multiple copies, booklet, job control partial stop functions, etc., the data for all the pages (in one job) that have been rasterized with the print controller are temporarily stored in the E-RDH memory. Therefore, when you print a document with a particularly large number of pages, if you use these functions, it may be impossible to print it correctly. In this case, it is recommended that the copier's E-RDH memory be expanded.

Expanding memory
To always obtain optimum printer performance, it is recommended that you expand the memory.

The memory for IP-424 cannot be expanded.

For details on expansion memory, consult your service representative.

466

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-5. Options

Hard Disk (IP-432 only)


A PCMCIA card type hard disk can be connected to the print controller. Hard disk of this printer controller is used for downloading a font when an optional PostScript3 is attached. Also if the hard disk is attached when the optional PostScript3 is attached, printer controller will operate on the hard disk. Hard disks that meet the following conditions are supported.
Card Type Power supply voltage Current consumption Safety approvals PCMCIA Type1 or Type2 3.3V+/-0.15V(Stand-alone operation) 500mA max. The following certifications must have already been acquired. UL Recognized Component (NWGQ2) Standard: UL1950 or UL60950 C-UL or CSA Recognized Component (NWGQ2) Standard: CSA c22.2 No.950 or CSA c22.2 No.60950 TV-GS Standard: EN 60950

The OS used in the print controller can handle disk capacities up to 2 GB. When a hard disk larger than 2 GB is connected, the hard disk capacity displayed on the copier Control Panel or [Setting information list] is 2 GB.

Recommended products
The following hard disks have been checked by Konica and found to be compliant.
Manufacturer TOSHIBA Product name PAMHD002 PAMHD005 Capacity 2GB 5GB The area that can actually be used is up to 2 GB. Remarks

For information on installing on the print controller, consult your service representative.

CF-101 compact flash ROM (IP-424 only)


The optional compact flash ROM CF-101 can be connected to this printer controller. The compact flash ROM CF-101 to be installed to this printer controller is used for downloading the fonts when the optional PostScript3 is installed.

CF-101 Product specifications


Card Type Capacity Power supply voltage Current consumption

Compliance with CFA Standard Rev.1.4 128MB 3.3V5%, 5V10%


During 3.3 : 75mA or less, During 5 : 120mA or less

For installing to the printer controller, contact the service shop.

467

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-5. Options

Problems with Optional Products


This section gives information concerning memory and hard disk problems and explains how to solve them.

Insufficient memory
The following print problems can occur due to insufficient print controller basic memory or copier main unit E-RDH memory. Parts of images are left out of printing. Forms are not printed Error dispersion is specified, but the data is printed with dither. Memory overflows occur. If any of the above problems occur, use the solutions on this page.
For details on the E-RDH memory, refer to [E-RDH (Electronic Recirculating Document Handler) memory] ( Page 466).

When parts of images are left out of printing


When the data for a single page in a print job received by the print controller is complex, for example when it includes an extremely large amount of straight lines and other vector graphics on one page for a graphics application, the memory used for rasterizing with the print controller may sometimes be insufficient. In this case, set the printer driver graphic setting to raster mode.

Forms are not printed


If any of the conditions below occur, forms may not be printed. The form exceeds the maximum data size The relationship between the memory installed in the print controller and the maximum size of form data is as follows.
Installed memory capacity 64 MB (no expansion memory) 192 MB (128 MB expansion memory) Maximum form data size Approx. 2.6 MB Approx. 7.8 MB

When [Make transparent] is specified with the [Form tab] When forms are not printed due to insufficient memory, it is recommended that the print controller's memory be expanded.

When error dispersion is specified, but the data is printed with dither
Error dispersal requires more printer memory for image processing than dither. In this case, it is recommended the print controller's memory be expanded.

468

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-5. Options

When memory overflows occur


The amount of data for print job depends on the functions selected with the printer driver (booklet, center fold/center bind functions, 2-in-1 functions, etc.) and on the number of pages in the print documents, so sometimes memory overflows occur in the copiers E-RDH memory. If a memory overflow occurs, the output for that print job is canceled. If the [Memory overflow] error message is displayed, cancel the print job, take the steps below, then issue the print instructions again. Check that there are currently no jobs in the copier being processed or waiting for processing, then send the job again. If the document has many pages, do not send the print instructions for all the pages at once, but rather send the print instructions divided over a number of jobs. Deleting unnecessary function specifications If memory overflows occur frequently, it is recommended that the copier's memory be expanded.

The hard disk does not operate normally


If the main power is switched off while the hard disk is operating, data may stop writing correctly and the hard disk may stop operating normally. If the hard disk is not operating normally, initialize it. For initializing method, consult with our service shop.

469

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


This lists the PCL printer driver setting items (Adobe PostScript if the PostScript option is installed). For details on the function settings, [Chapter 3 Printing from Windows] ( Printing from a Macintosh] ( Page 232). Page 112), [Chapter 4

PCL Function List


The tabs in the main text show the [KONICA MINOLTA 7145/IP-432] property tabs.
Tab name Setting item Comment Separator page [none] Full Simple Print test Print to the port COMx: (Communications port) FILE: (Makes a file on the disk) LPT1: (ECP printer port) Network Other Device Path Reconnect at logon Setting value Summary This inputs a comment. This selects the separator page. Specify the folder in which the file used is stored as the separator page. This prints a test page. This sets the print port. Printing is not possible from serial port Comx. Reference page

General

Browse

Page 32, 62

Add port Delete Port Print using the following driver Details New Driver Capture Printer Port

This adds a port. This deletes an unnecessary port. This selects the driver used for printing. This adds a driver for printing. This specifies the printer device name/path for printing through the network. This also sets whether or not to automatically connect when logging on to the network. This deletes the network path for an unnecessary network printer. This sets the parallel port timeout time (in seconds) and the wait time (in seconds) until transmission is retried.

Page 223, 227 Page 223, 227 Page 221, 224 Page 222

End Capture Time out settings

Not selected (seconds) Transmission retry (seconds)

Page 222 Page 225, 229

470

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


Tab name Setting item Spool settings Setting value Spools print jobs program finishes printing faster Start printing after last page is spooled Start printing after first page is spooled Print directly to the printer Bi-directional support for this printer Spool MS-DOS print jobs Check port state before printing 1 to 999 ON OFF Summary This sets whether or not to spool print data when it is sent to the printer from an application. Reference page Page 223, 227, 231

Details

Port Settings

This sets whether or not to spool MS-DOS print jobs and whether or not to check the status of the LPTx: port before printing. This sets the number of copies to print. This sets whether or not to sort in order of page numbers when printing jobs with multiple copies of multiple pages. This sets the direction for printing. This sets the optional functions for printing, such as Offset and Staples. Select functions in the upper column, and setting options in the lower column.

Page 222

Copies Collate

Page 134 Page 164, 267

Orientation Features

Portrait Landscape Offset Staple Combination Punch Fold&Stich Punch Holes Smoothing Toner Save 5.5"8.5" 8.5"11" 8.5"14" 11"17" A3-297420mm A4-210297mm A5-148210mm B4-250354mm B5-182257mm B6-128182mm F4-8.0"13" 8K-267390mm 16K-195267mm -NoneFlip on long edge Flip on short edge

Page 136 Page 158, 166, 169, 173, 188, 190

Paper Paper Size

This sets the size of the paper to print on.

Page 240

Duplex

This sets whether or not to make a duplex printing and the paper direction for folding.

Page 153

471

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


Tab name Setting item Media Type Setting value Plain paper OHP [Transparency] OHP-Interleave [Blank] OHP-Interleave [Print] -DefaultTray1 Tray2 Auto Select Bypass tray Tray1 Tray2 Tray3 Tray4 Tray5 ON OFF Summary This sets the media type for output. Reference page Page 140

Output Tray

This sets the output tray.

Page 146

Paper Source

This selects the input tray containing the paper to print on.

Page 144, 248

Password Print

Paper Hold ON OFF

This sets whether or not to Password print. When you select ON, enter your User ID and Password into the screen displayed. This sets whether or not to hold the printed text in the box. When you click on OFF, the [Print & Hold] screen appears. Enter the box No. and the like into the screen displayed.

Page 211

Page 216

Hold & Print

ON OFF

This sets whether or not to hold or print the printed text in the box. When you click on OFF, the [Print & Hold] screen appears. Enter the box No. and the like into the screen displayed. Page 216

User Setting Restore Defaults

User ID Password

This sets User ID and Password for Password Print. This returns the contents set here to their default values.

Page 211

472

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


Tab name Setting item Front cover Setting value Blank Printed Summary This sets whether or not to print the first page on the front cover when the front cover paper is different from the paper for the main text. This sets whether or not to print the last page on the back cover when the back cover paper is different from the paper for the main text. This sets the paper source for the paper used for front covers and back covers. Reference page Page 177

Back cover

Blank Printed

Page 177

Cover Tray Bypass tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Tray 5 Solid Black and White Patterned Grays Diffused Grays -100 to 100 -100 to 100 ON OFF 1 2 4 6 9 16 10% to 400% Outline soft fonts Bitmap soft fonts Rasters PCL-5E (Monochrome) PCL-6 (Monochrome)

Page 177

Restore Defaults Halftoning

This returns the contents set here to their default values. This sets the reproduction method of halftone area.

Page 187

Brightness Graphics Contrast Negative Restore Defaults Layout- pages per sheet

Adjust the Brightness of the image. Adjust the Contrast of the image. This sets whether or not to reverse the image. This returns the contents set here to their default values. This prints combining multiple pages from the document into one page of print paper.

Page 187 Page 187 Page 193 Page 260

Layout- Scaling Options True Type options Printer Language

This sets the scaling value. This sets TrueType font settings.

Page 142 Page 196

This sets a printer language for printing.

Page 132

Restore Defaults

This returns the contents set here to their default values.

473

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


Tab name Setting item Watermark- Text Setting value CONFIDENTIAL COPY DRAFT FILE COPY FINAL PROOF TOP SECRET ALL but first page All pages First page only No watermark 1 to 14 Summary This selects characters for watermarks. Reference page Page 207

WatermarkPage

This sets the range to apply watermarks.

Page 207

Watermark- Top Watermark- Bottom WatermarkCount Watermark- Separation

This sets watermarks to [Top]. This sets watermarks to [Bottom]. This sets the number to repeat watermarks in one page of print paper. This sets the interval between watermarks, when multiple watermarks are printed on one page of print paper.

Page 207 Page 207 Page 207

0 to 50

Page 207

Font- Name Font- Color Watermarks Font- Darkness Font- Bold Font- Italic Font- Size PositionAutomatically PositionUser defined Position- Angle Adjustment- Move AdjustmentRotate Show layout New Delete Restore Defaults

Black Dark Gray Light Gray White 0% to 100% ON OFF ON OFF 1 to 300 X:0 to 100 Y:0 to 100 0 to 360

This selects fonts for watermarks. This sets the color of watermarks.

Page 207 Page 207

This sets the density of watermarks. This sets whether or not to put characters in bold type face. This sets whether or not to put characters in italics. This sets the character size. This sets the position of watermarks automatically. This sets any position of watermarks. This sets the angle of watermarks. This changes the adjustment value. This repeats adjustment.

Page 207 Page 207 Page 207 Page 207 Page 207 Page 207 Page 207 Page 207 Page 207

This creates new watermarks. This deletes the current watermarks. This returns the contents set here to their default values.

Page 207 Page 207 Page 207

474

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


Tab name Setting item Symbol- File Symbol- Page Setting value -None1.BMP All but first page All Pages First page only No overlay Shade- Color Black Dark Gray Light Gray White 0 to 100 10 to 100 10 to 100 X:0~100 Y:0~100 This returns the contents set here to their default values. Summary This sets whether or not to apply overlay. This sets the range to apply overlay. Reference page Page 204 Page 204

Select Bitmap

This displays the [Open overlay file] screen. Select the file for overlay in this screen. This sets the color of shade.

Page 204

Page 204

Overlay

ShadeDarkness SizeAutomatically SizeUser defined Percent PositionAutomatically PositionUser defined Show Layout Restore Defaults

This sets the density of shade. This sets the size where the symbol is automatically applied. This sets any size where the symbol is applied. This sets the percentage for any size where the symbol is applied. This sets the position of symbol automatically. This sets any position of symbol.

Page 204 Page 204 Page 204 Page 204 Page 204 Page 204 Page 204 Page 204

475

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


Tab name Setting item Mode Selection FAX Mode SetupResolution FAX Mode SetupSetup Setting value FAX Printer 200dpi 400dpi Summary This switches the document destination between fax and printer. This sets the resolution for fax transmission. When you click here, the [Fax Mode Setup] screen is displayed. This screen is used to make various settings for fax transmission. This inputs the name of the fax recipient. This inputs the fax number of the recipient. This sets whether or not to use ECM (error correction) for fax transmission. Check this setting to slow the communications speed for international calls. This is to be set when sending faxes in super G3 mode. Clicking here adds the contents set with the [Direct input] column to the [Recipient list]. Clicking here displays a list of the fax numbers already registered so that you can select the fax recipient from that list. This displays detailed information for the fax recipients already registered. This deletes the recipient selected in the [Recipients] from that list. Reference page Page 313 Page 313 Page 313

Enter Recipient - Recipient - Name Enter Recipient - Recipient - Fax No. Enter Recipient - Recipient - Error Correction Mode FAX Enter Recipient - Recipient - Intl Transmission Mode Enter Recipient - Recipient - V.34Mode Enter Recipient - Recipient - Add Phonebook ON OFF

Page 313

Page 313

Page 313

ON OFF

Page 313

ON OFF

Page 313

Page 313

Page 313

Recipients Recipients - Delete

Page 313

Page 313

476

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


Tab name Setting item Options- Available options Setting value Base DB-211[w/2 Trays] Base DB-411[w/1 Tray] Fax Option FS-112[w/2 Trays] FS-112[w/3 Trays] FS-112[w/4 Trays] FS-113[w/2 Trays] FS-114 Punch Option FS-114[w/2 Trays] FS-114[w/2 Trays+Saddle] FS-114[w/3 Trays+Saddle] FS-114[w/3 Trays] HD-103 IT-101 [w/2 Trays] LT-203 Summary This selects the expansion equipment adding to the copier. Reference page Page 23, 38, 52, 78

Setup

Add

This adds the expansion equipment selected with [Available options] - [Installed options].

Page 23, 38, 52, 78

OptionsInstalled options Remove

This displays the added expansion equipment. This removes the expansion equipment selected with [Installed options]. This sets the memory installed in the copier.

Page 23, 38, 52, 78 Page 23, 38, 52, 78

Installed memory

64MB 128MB 192MB

Page 220, 224, 228

About

This displays the printer driver version information.

477

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List

Adobe PostScript Function List


The tabs in the main text show the [KONICA MINOLTA IP-432 PS] property tabs.
Tab name Setting item Setting value Summary Reference page

Comment Separator page [none] Full Simple

This inputs a comment. This selects the separator page. This specifies the name of the folder in which the file used for the separator page is stored. This prints a test page. This sets the print port. Printing is not possible from serial port Comx.

General

Browse Print Test Page Print to the following port COMx: (Communications port) FILE : (Creates a file on disk) LPT1 : (Printer Port) Network Other Drivers Device Path Reconnect at logon

Page 32, 46

Add Port Delete Port Details Print using the following driver New Driver Capture Printer Port

This adds a port. This deletes an unnecessary port. This selects the driver used for printing. This adds a driver for printing. This specifies the printer device name/path for printing through the network. This also sets whether or not to automatically connect when logging on to the network.

Page 223 Page 223 Page 221 Page 222

478

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


Tab name Setting item Setting value Summary Reference page

End Capture Time out settings Not selected (seconds) Transmission retry (seconds)

This deletes the network path for an unnecessary network printer. This sets the parallel port time out time (in seconds) and the wait time (in seconds) until transmission is retried. This sets whether or not to spool print data when it is sent to the printer from an application.

Page 222

Page 221

Spool settings

Details

Spool print jobs so program finishes printing faster. Start printing after last page is spooled Start printing after first page is spooled Print directly to the printer Spool data format:RAW Disable bi-directional support for this printer. Enable bi-dinectional support for this printer. Spool MS-DOS print jobs Check port state before printing Statement/Letter/ Legal/Tabloid/A3/A4/ A5/B4/B5/B6/F4/8K/ 16K

Page 223, 227, 231

Port settings

This sets whether or not to spool MS-DOS print jobs and whether or not to check the status of the port before printing. This sets the size of the paper used for output. The paper sizes that can be set depend on the specifications for the country and on the tray. For details, refer to the copier user's manual. This sets the direction for printing. This sets the binding direction during finishing for paper printed on both sides. This sets the input tray. The number of trays available for selection depends on the copier model and the options installed.

Page 222

Paper size

Page 138

Orientation

Portrait/F4/8K/16K Landscape Rotated None Flip on long edge Flip on short edge Auto Select Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Tray 5 Manual feed Default Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4

Page 136

Print Control Paper Paper source

Page 153

Page 248

Paper output method

This sets the output tray. The number of trays available for selection depends on the copier model and the options installed.

Page 146

479

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


Tab name Setting item Setting value Summary Reference page

Paper type

Plain paper OHP (Trans parency) OHP-Interleave [Blank] OHP-Interleave [printed] Inches Millimeters 0.18~7.67 (Inches) 4.6-145.5 (Millimeters) 0.18~7.67 (Inches) 4.6-145.5 (Millimeters) 0.18-5.25 (Inches) 4.6-104.8 (Millimeters) 0.18-5.25 (Inches) 4.6-104.8 (Millimeters) 600dpi ON OFF ON OFF 1 up 2 up 4 up 6 up 9 up 16 up ON OFF

This sets the media type for output.

Page 140

Margins - Units Margins - Top Paper Margins - Bottom Margins - Left Margins - Right About Help Restore Defaults Resolution Special - Print as a negative image Special - Print as a mirror image Paper handling - Layout

This sets the unit for margins set for print paper. This sets the amount of the top margin. This sets the amount of the bottom margin. This sets the amount of the left margin. This sets the amount of the right margin. This displays the printer driver version information. This displays the help file. This returns the contents set here to their default values. This displays the output resolution. This sets whether or not to reverse white and black when printing. This sets whether or not to reverse left and right when printing. This prints combining multiple pages from the document into one page of print paper.

Page 148 Page 148 Page 148 Page 148 Page 148 Page 192 Page 193

Page 195

Page 155

Graphics

Paper handling - Print page border Scaling Convert gray text to PostSript gray Convert gray graphics to PostScript gray Help Restore Defaults

This sets whether or not to print a border around each document page for layout printing. This sets the amount of enlargement or reduction. This sets whether or not to convert gray text in a document into PostScript gray. This sets whether or not to convert gray images in a document into PostScript gray. This displays the help file. This returns the contents set here to their default values.

Page 155

25% to 400% ON OFF ON OFF

Page 142

480

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


Tab name Setting item Setting value Summary Reference page

Substitute printer fonts for TrueType fonts when applicable Do not use printer fonts. Add Euro currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts. Update Soft Fonts Send Font As - TrueType fonts - Send True Type fonts as Fonts Send Fonts As - Threshold to switch between downloading bitmap or outline fonts, measured in pixels [in pixel size at the current resolution] Send Fonts As - PostScript fonts - Send PostScript fonts as Help Restore Defaults

ON OFF

This sets whether or not to replace TrueType fonts within the document with printer fonts. This sets whether or not to use printer fonts for printing. This sets whether or not to add the Euro currency symbol to PostScript fonts. Clicking here recognizes software fonts. This sets the method for transmitting fonts from an application. This sets the amount of the bitmap and outline font switching.

ON OFF ON OFF

Page 197

Outlines Bitmaps Type42 Dont Send 0 to 9,999

In Native Format Dont Send

This sets the method for transmitting PostScript fonts from an application. This displays the help file. This returns the contents set here to their default values.

481

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


Tab name Setting item Setting value Summary Reference page

Available printermemory Printer features

0 to 200,000

This sets the amount of printer memory allocated when printing documents. This displays a list of the printer functions that can be set for printing and their current settings.

Page 158, 164, 166, 169, 177, 188, 190

Job Offset Collate Combination Stapling Punch Punch Holes Fold&Stich Front Cover Back cover Front/Back Cover Tray Smoothing Toner save Finisher Drawer Base Memory Configuration Large Capacity Tray PostScript [optimized for speed] PostScript [optimize for portability-ADSC] Encapsulated PostScript [EPS] Archive format Download header with each print job Assume header is downloaded and retained ON OFF 0 to 999 seconds

Device Options

Printer features - Change setting for Installable options

This changes the value of the function selected with [Printer functions]. This displays a list of the status of the copier's optional equipment. This changes the contents of the expansion equipment selected with [Expansion options]. This displays the help file. This returns the contents set here to their default values. This sets the format for PostScript output from applications.

Page 158, 164, 166, 169, 177, 188, 190 Page 45

Instalbble options - Change setting for Help Restore Defaults PostScript output format

Page 45

Page 197

PostScript headers PostScript PostScript headers - Send Header Now Printing PostScript error information PostScript time out values - Job timeout

This sets whether or not to download the PostScript header for each job.

Page 198

Clicking here starts downloading of the PostScript header. This sets whether or not to print a report when a PostScript error occurs. This sets the time in seconds for a transmitted job to be judged to have timed out.

Page 198

Page 199

Page 200

482

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-6. Function List


Tab name Setting item Setting value Summary Reference page

PostScript time out values - Wait timeout Advanced - PostScript language level Advanced - Data format

0 to 999 seconds

This sets the time in seconds for a transmitted job to be judged to have timed out. This sets the PostScript language level used. This sets the data format used for transmitting print data.

Page 200

3 2 ASCII data Binary communications protocol Tagged binary communications protocol Pure binary data ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

PostScript

Advanced - Send Ctrl+D before job Advanced - Send Ctrl+D after job Advanced - Display alert for applications incompatible with driver features Help Restore Defaults Select a Watermark

This sets whether or not to send Ctrl+D before jobs. This sets whether or not to send Ctrl+D after jobs. This sets whether or not to output a warning when an attempt is made to use an application that is not compatible with driver functions (page layout, watermark). This displays the help file. This returns the contents set here to their default values. This displays a list of the watermarks that can be selected for printing. Clicking here displays the [Edit watermark] screen. On this screen, you can change the contents of the watermark selected with the [Select a watermark] column. Clicking here displays the [New watermark] screen. On this screen, you can change the contents of a new watermark. This deletes the watermark selected with the [Select a watermark] column. This sets how the watermark is to be printed on the document. This displays the help file.

Page 209

None CONFIDENTIAL COPY DRAFT

Edit

Page 209

Watermarks

New

Page 209

Delete Print watermark On first page only In background As outline only

Page 209

Page 207

Help

483

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts
This section explains, using screen fonts recorded on the [User software CD], and downloading fonts to HDD when PostScript option installed.

Using the Accessory Screen Fonts


The following screen fonts are recorded on the [User software CD]. PCL font (TrueType font) 80 fonts PostScript Type 1 font (only when PostScript option installed) 136 fonts Installing these fonts on the computer provides a WYSIWYG environment in which you can create documents while checking it on the computer screen in a state close to finished state.
For details on the attached fonts, ([PCL Font List] Page 496). Page 491),([PostScript Font List]

484

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

Installing Screen Fonts


To use the fonts recorded on the [User software CD], it is necessary to install the fonts on the operating system you are using.The installation procedure depends on the operating system used and on whether or not the PostScript option is installed.

True Type font installation (Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP)

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.


When using the PostScript option, put the PostScript option [User software CD].

2 3 4 5

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Control Panel]. The [Control panel] window is displayed. Double click the [Font] icon. The contents in the [Fonts] folder is displayed. From the menu bar, select [File] [Install New Font]. The [Add Fonts] screen is displayed. In [Drive], select the computer's CD-ROM drive. As the folder, double-click any folder on the [User software CD]. IP432 [User software CD]: [\English\Screenfonts] PS-344 [User software CD]. [\English\Screenfonts\PS Screen Fonts\TrueType (Core OS) fonts] Font information is displayed on the [List of Fonts]. Select the font to install in the [List of Fonts].

Ensure that the [Copy font to font folder] checkbox is On.

Click the [OK] button. The selected font is installed. From now on, this installed font can be used.

485

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

PostScript font installation (Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0) (Only when PostScript option is installed)
Install Adobe Type Manager (ATM) before installing PostScript fonts.
For details on installing Adobe Type Manager, [Installing Adobe Type Manager (ATM)] ( Page 488).

1 2 3 4 5

Put the PostScript option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Programs] [Adobe] [Abode Type Manager 4.1]. Adobe Type Manager is started. Click the [Adobe Type Manager] screen [Font] tab. In [Source], select [Browse Fonts]. In the directory selection section, select the [User software CD] [\English\Screenfonts\PS Screen Fonts\Type1fonts]. A list of the installable fonts is displayed. Select the font to install. Click the [Add] button. The selected font is installed. Adobe Type Manager is closed. From now on, this installed font can be used.

6 7 8

486

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

PostScript fonts Installation (Windows 2000/XP) (Only when the PostScript option is installed)
Since Windows 2000/XP incorporates in the operating system itself the same functions provided by Adobe Type Manager (ATM), ATM is not needed to install PostScript fonts.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Put the PostScript option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] [Control panel]. The [Control panel] screen is displayed. Double click the [Fonts] icon. The contents in the [Fonts] is displayed. From the menu bar, select [File] [Install New Font]. The [Add Fonts] screen is displayed. In [Drive], select the computer's CD-ROM drive. As the folder, double-click the [\English\Screenfonts\PS Screen Fonts\Type1fonts] folder. Select the font to install in the [List of Fonts].

Ensure that the [Copy font to font folder] checkbox is On.

Click the [OK] button. The selected font is installed. From now on, this installed font can be used.

487

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

Installing Adobe Type Manager (ATM)

1 2 3 4

Put the PostScript option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive. From the task bar [Start] select [Run].
The [Run] dialog box is displayed.

As the name, input [\English\Screenfonts\ATM Light\atm41.exe], then click the [OK] button.
The setup program is started and the installation screen is displayed.

Check the contents, then click the [Next ] button.

The [Select Country] screen is displayed.

Select your country, then click the [Next ] button.

The [Software License Agreement] screen is displayed.

488

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

6 7 8 9

Check the contents, then click the [Yes] button.


The [User Information] screen is displayed.
To install and use Adobe Type Manager, agreement to the [Software License Agreement] is required.

Input the user information (name and company name), then click the [Next ] button.
A screen to confirm the input user information is displayed.

Check the contents, then click the [Yes] button.


The [Select components] screen is displayed.

Check the contents, then click the [Next ] button.

[Select Program Folder] screen is displayed.

10 11 12

Click the [Next ] button.


The [Start Copying Files] screen is displayed.

Click the [Next ] button.


The installation is started. After the installation is complete, the [Adobe Type Manager] screen is displayed.

Click the [Finish] button.


The [Setup complete] screen is displayed.
If the [Display Adobe Type Manager Readme file] checkbox is checked and you click the [Finish] button, the ATM Readme file is displayed.

489

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

13

Select the timing for restarting the computer, then click the [Finish] button.
When [Yes, I want to restart my computer now] is selected, the computer is immediately restarted. When [No, I will restart my computer later] is selected, the computer is not restarted. Execute necessary operations, close down the computer, then restart it.

When the computer is restarted, the ATM is enabled.

Downloading Fonts
The printer font is downloaded to the hard disk in the print controller. For details on downloading fonts, refer to the user's manual that came with the fonts.

Select [disk0] as the destination for downloading to the hard disk in the print controller. If fonts are downloaded to [disk1], they cannot be used. Also, when fonts are downloaded to [disk1] the print controller may stop operating normally. When the font download is complete, switch the copier main power Off, wait about 10 seconds, and switch the power back On again.The downloaded fonts cannot be used normally until the copier has been restarted.B

490

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

PCL Font List

491

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

492

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

493

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

494

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

495

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

PostScript Font List

496

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

497

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

498

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-7. Fonts

499

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-8. Font Number List (Control Panel-PCL Setup)


Font#
0 line printer 1 line printer 2 line printer 3 line printer 4 line printer 5 line printer 6 line printer 7 line printer 8 Courier Bold Italic 9 Courier Bold 10 Courier Italic 11 Courier 12 Letter Gothic 13 Letter Gothic Italic 14 Letter Gothic Bold 15 Courier PS 16 Courier PS Oblique 17 Courier PS Bold 18 Courier PS Bold Oblique 19 CG Times Bold Italic 20 CG Times Bold 21 CG Times Italic 22 CG Times 23 Albertus Medium 24 Albertus Extra Bold 25 Antique Olive 26 Antique Olive Italic 27 Antique Olive Bold 28 Univers Medium 29 Univers Medium Italic 30 Univers Bold 31 Univers Bold Italic 32 Claredon Condensed

Font

Pitch/Point
16.67/8.5 16.67/8.5 16.67/8.5 16.67/8.5 16.67/8.5 16.67/8.5 16.67/8.5 16.67/8.5 scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable

500

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-8. Font Number List (Control Panel-PCL Setup)


Font#
33 Coronet 34 GaramondAntiqua 35 Garamond Kursiv 36 Garamond Halbfett 37 Garamond Kursiv Halbfett 38 Marigold 39 CG Omega 40 CG Omega Italic 41 CG Omega Bold 42 CG Omega Bold Italic 43 SymbolPS 44 Times New 45 Times New Italic 46 Times New Bold 47 Times New Bold Italic 48 Helvetica 49 Helvetica Oblique 50 Helvetica Bold 51 Helvetica Bold Oblique 52 Univers Medium Condensed 53 Univers Medium Condensed Italic 54 Univers Bold Condensed 55 Univers Bold Condensed Italic 56 ITC Avant Garde Book 57 ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique 58 ITC Avant Garde Demi 59 ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique 60 ITC Bookman Light 61 ITC Bookman Light Italic 62 ITC Bookman Demi 63 ITV Bookman Demi Italic 64 Arial 65 Arial Italic 66 Arial Bold 67 Arial Bold Italic 68 Helvetica Narrow 69 Helvetica Narrow Oblique 70 Helvetica Narrow Bold 71 Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique

Font

Pitch/Point
scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable

501

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-8. Font Number List (Control Panel-PCL Setup)


Font# Font Pitch/Point
scalable scalable scalable

72 New Century Schoolbook Roman 73 New Century Schoolbook Italic 74 New Century Schoolbook Bold

75 New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic scalable 76 Palatino Roman 77 Palatino Italic 78 Palatino Bold 79 Palatino Bold Italic 80 Courier 81 Times Roman 82 Times Italic 83 Times Bold 84 Times Bold Italic 85 ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic 86 Courier 87 Symbol 88 Wingdings scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable scalable

[SYM] Symbol set [PIT] Pitch:0.44-99.95 [POI] Point size:0.4-99.75 PCL version5.6.2

502

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-9. Symbol Sets List (Control Panel-PCL Setup)


Symbol Set ID
7J 0S 0I 2S 1G 1E 0U 0D 1F 0N 2N 5N 1U 8M 12J 6J 10U 11U 9T 12U 17U 15U 5M 10J 8U 13J 6M 14J 9U 19U 9E 5T Not Supported: 19M 579L

Symbol Set Name (Printer LCD panel)


DESKTOP ISO 11 ISO 15 ISO 17 ISO 21 ISO 4 ISO 6 ISO 60 ISO 69 ISO L1 ISO L2 ISO L5 LEGAL MATH-8 MC TEXT MS PUBL PC-8 PC-8 D/N PC8-TK PC-850 PC-852 PI FONT PS MATH PS TEXT ROMAN-8 VN INTL VN MATH VN US WIN 3.0 WIN L1 WIN L2 WIN L5 Not Supported: Symbol Wingdings

Symbol Set Name (WebUtilities)


Desktop ISO 11 Swedish ISO 15 Italian ISO 17 Spanish ISO 21 Germany ISO 4 United Kingdom ISO 6 ASCII ISO 60 Danish ISO 69 French ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 Legal Math-8 MC Text Microsoft Publishing PC-8 PC-8 D/N (Danish/Norwegian) PC-8 Turkish PC-850 PC-852 Pi-Font PS Math PS Text Roman-8 Ventura International Ventura Math Ventura US Windows 3.0 "Latin 1" Windows 3.1 Latin 1 "ANSI" Windows 3.1 Latin 2 Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Not Supported:

503

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-9. Symbol Sets List (Control Panel-PCL Setup)

504

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-10. PCL Macro and Font


PCL macro
By downloading a macro (print data) to the optional hard disk of the printer controller or to the compact flash ROM (CF-101) beforehand, print commands, including a macro execution command are executed to enable overlay printing of template forms when printing from a host computer or Unix, without routing the printer driver.

When the optional hard disk or compact flash ROM (CF-101) is not installed, the PCL marco and font download function cannot be used.

Downloading the PCL macro


The following Print Stream commands are used to download the PCL macro to the optional hard disk of the printer controller or the compact flash ROM (CF-101). Download macros are stored to the hard disk in the MDM directory (/ata2/int/pcl/mdm). Print Stream commands for download <esc>0x010x02MACROLD,aaa,nnn,MacroFile0x03 <esc>0x010x02: Hex character (Fixed) Used to get the print controller into print stream command mode. MACROLD: Print stream command (Fixed) Load a macro on the hard disk. aaa: macro ID Specifies the ID of the macro saved within a range 000-999. The ID specified here is used for calling up the macro. nnn: Size of macro file Size of macro file is the number of bytes between the third comma and the final hex 0x03 character (not including the third comma or the hex 0x03 character.) MacroFile: Contents of macro file Data to be saved as macro 0x03: Hex character (Fixed) Indicates the end of data.

Be sure to attach three commas which delimit data. If commands other than "macro ID, Size of macro file, Contents of macro file" are changed, they cannot be executed correctly.

505

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-10. PCL Macro and Font

Printing the PCL macro


The following Print Stream commands are used for printing the macro data downloaded to the optional hard disk of the printer controller or to the compact flash ROM (CF-101). By adding the following Print Stream commands to the print data during printing from the host computer or Unix, overlay printing can be performed. Print Stream commands for printing <esc>0x260x66aaa0x59<esc>0x260x660x320x58<esc>0x45 <esc>0x260x66: Hex character (Fixed) Used to get the print controller into the print stream command mode. aaa: macro ID Specifies the macro ID that was set between a range 000-999 when the macro is saved. 0x59<esc>0x260x660x320x58<esc>0x45: Hex character (Fixed) Execution command and end command for macro printing

When the commands other than "macro ID" are modified, such commands cannot be executed properly.

Downloading PCL fonts


The following Print Stream commands are used for downloading the soft fonts in compliance with PCL5e to the optional hard disk of the printer controller or to the compact flash ROM (CF-101). Download fonts are stored to the hard disk in the FONTS directory (/ata2/int/pcl/fonts). Print stream commands for downloading <esc>0x010x02FONT2D,aaa,nnn,FontData0x03 <esc>0x010x02: Hex character (Fixed) Used to get the print controller into the print stream command mode. FONT2D: Print stream command (Fixed) Load fonts to the hard disk. aaa: Font ID Specifies the ID of the fonts to be saved within a range 088-999. nnn: Size of fonts file Size of fonts file is the number of bytes between the third comma and the final hex 0x03 character (not including the third comma or the hex 0x03 character.) FontData: Contents of fonts file Font data to be saved 0x03: Hex character (Fixed) Indicates the end of data.

506

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-10. PCL Macro and Font

Attach three commas which delimit data. If commands other than "Font ID, Size of fonts file, Contents of fonts file" are changed, they cannot be executed correctly.

507

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-11. Index According to Item


Numerics
100Base-TX ........................................................... 379 10Base-T ............................................................... 379 Downloading fonts ................................................. driver name ................................................ 220, driver version ................................... 220, 224, Duplex ........................................................ 153, duplex printing ....................................................... 490 224 228 353 258

A
Access rights ......................................... 34, 48, 65 Add Printer Wizard ................................ 25, 39, 53 Adding driver ........................ 220, 221, 224, 228 Adobe PostScript Driver ........................................... 16 Adobe PostScript Driver installation ...... 25, 53, 88 AppleTalk ............................................................... 380 Archive format ........................................................ 197 ASCII ...................................................................... 294 Auto reset timer ...................................................... 372

E
EKC/ECM .............................................................. 296 EKC/ECM counter ................................................. 300 EKC/ECM limits ..................................................... 300 enlarged ................................................................ 246 EPS ............................................................ 197, 293 E-RDH ................................................................... 466 E-RDH memory ..................................................... 466 error report ............................................................ 320 Ethernet ................................................................... 10 Euro currency symbol ........................................... 197 Executing a test print ............................. 46, 62, 80 Expanding memory ............................................... 466

B
Back cover ................................................. 177, 281 Banner Page .......................................................... 345 Banner Page Tray .................................................. 347 Bi-directional support ............................................. 223 Binary ..................................................................... 294 Bindery context ...................................................... 407 Bindery emulation ...................................... 404, 405 bindery service emulation ...................................... 404 bitmap format preview ............................................ 293 black and white reversed ........................... 193, 285 Booklet ....................................................... 158, 264 Booklet-Right ......................................................... 158 Brightness .............................................................. 187 Broadcast ............................................................... 327 broadcast group ..................................................... 327

F
Fast Ethernet ......................................................... 379 fax kit .......................................................... 309, 311 Fax mode .................................................................. 7 Fax transmission ................................................... 313 file save ................................................................. 293 fine mode .............................................................. 314 Flip Horizontal ....................................................... 284 Flip on long edge ........................................ 153, 258 Flip on short edge ...................................... 153, 258 Flip Vertical ........................................................... 284 Flow for printing ......................................................... 8 font ........................................................................ 196 Font Inclusion ........................................................ 294 font list ........................................................ 491, 496 Fonts ..................................................................... 484 Format ................................................................... 294 Frames .................................................................. 261 Front cover ................................................. 177, 281 Function list ..................................... 130, 234, 470

C
Checking the printer driver .............. 220, 224, 228 Collate ........................................................ 164, 267 Combination ............................................... 155, 158 confidential transmission ........................................ 314 Config.Data ............................................................ 344 Connection diagram ................................................. 11 Conserving toner .................................................... 291 Contrast ................................................................. 187 Control panel .......................................................... 458 Copy mode ......................................................... 7, 8 counter values ........................................................ 300 Creating groups ..................................................... 324 Custom Page Default ............................................. 242

H
Halftoning .............................................................. 187 Hard disk ............................................................... 467

I
image .................................................................... 187 Image View ........................................................... 129 Incomplete job list ................................................. 306 input tray ............................................................... 248 Installing fonts ....................................................... 485 Interfaces ................................................................ 10 Internet printing ..................................................... 409 intranet .................................................................. 409 IPP ........................................................................ 409 IPP attribute .......................................................... 410

D
Default Paper ......................................................... 351 default printer ................................................. 22, 58 default setting ......................................................... 351 Delayed Transmission ........................................... 314 Delete port ............................................................. 223 Deleting the printer port ............................. 226, 230 destination .............................................................. 315 Direction ................................................................. 238

508

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-11. Index According to Item

J
jaggedness ................................................. 188, 289 Job Time Out ......................................................... 200

O
Offset .......................................................... 166, 269 OHP ...................................................................... 244 on combined pages ............................................... 261 Operation environment ............................................ 10 Options .................................................................. 466 order ...................................................................... 250 order in which pages can be assigned .................. 261 Orientation .................................................. 136, 355 Output tray ...................................... 146, 251, 373 Overlay .................................................................. 204 Override Paper ...................................................... 359

K
Key operator mode ................................................ 370

L
Landscape ................................................. 169, 271 language level ........................................................ 294 layout ..................................................................... 260 Layout direction ...................................................... 261 left binding .............................................................. 264 left/right reversed ....................................... 195, 284 limit on the number of sheets printed ..................... 300 limiter value ................................................ 296, 300 Local printer ............................................ 3, 26, 55 LPD ........................................................................ 384 lpd .......................................................................... 427 LPD/LPR .................................................... 380, 384 LPD/LPR printer .............................. 387, 392, 396 LPD/LPR printer port ....................... 387, 392, 396 LPR ........................................................................ 384 LPT ........................................................................ 222 LPT port ................................................................. 222

P
Page notation language .......................................... 17 Pages per sheet/Layout ........................................ 155 Paper size .................................................. 138, 240 Paper Source ............................................. 144, 248 Paper type ............................................................. 140 Parallel interface ..................................................... 10 Password .............................................................. 211 Password print ...................................................... 211 PC-Fax .................................................................. 309 PC-Fax transmission flow ......................................... 9 PCL ......................................................................... 16 PCL Demo Page ................................................... 340 PCL Driver ............................................................... 16 PCL Driver installation ................. 18, 35, 49, 66 PCL Font List ............................................. 341, 491 PCONSOLE .......................................................... 406 PDL Select ............................................................ 349 Peer-to-Peer ............................................... 379, 382 phonebook ...................................... 310, 315, 322 Plain paper ............................................................ 244 port .......................................................................... 40 Port addition/deletion ...................... 223, 227, 231 port connecting ...................................................... 220 Port settings .......................................................... 222 Portrait ........................................................ 169, 271 ports ............................................................... 21, 28 PostScript error ..................................................... 305 PostScript error information .................................. 199 PostScript files ...................................................... 293 PostScript font ....................................................... 197 PostScript format ................................................... 293 PostScript header .................................................. 198 PostScript Job ....................................................... 293 PostScript level ..................................................... 294 PostScript output format ........................................ 197 PostScript PS-343 option product specifications ..... 465 PostScript timeout ................................................. 200 PostScript Type 1 font ........................................... 484 Preparing a new phonebook ................................. 332 primary file server .................................................. 403 Print as a mirror image .......................................... 195 print direction ......................................................... 238 print order .............................................................. 250

M
Macintosh ............................................................... 380 magnification ratio .................................................. 246 Managing the print count ....................................... 296 Margins ...................................................... 148, 253 Media Type ................................................ 140, 244 Memory .................................................................. 466 Menu Configuration ................................................ 337 Microsoft TCP/IP printing ....................................... 386 Mirror image ........................................................... 284 mode is switched ....................................................... 7 multiple pages on one sheet .................................. 260

N
NDS ........................................................... 404, 406 negative image ........................................... 193, 285 NetWare ................................................................. 380 NetWare 3.x ........................................................... 403 NetWare 4.x ........................................................... 404 network .................................................................. 379 Network printer ........................................ 4, 26, 56 Network printer server .............................................. 41 network service ...................................................... 386 non-standard paper size ........................................ 242 notice list/password ................................................ 403 Novell Directory Service ......................................... 404 number of copies to print ........................... 134, 236 number of sheets printed is counted ...................... 300 NWADMIN ............................................................. 406

509

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-11. Index According to Item


print quality ............................................................. 187 print queue ............................................................. 403 Print screen ............................................................ 233 printed laid out ....................................................... 260 printer daemon ....................................................... 384 Printer EKC/ECM ................................................... 296 Printer mode .............................................................. 7 Printer Name ............................................................ 21 Printer port assignment .............................. 226, 230 printer server .......................................................... 403 Printing from an application ......... 33, 47, 64, 82 Printing on .............................................................. 258 Printing overlaying ................................................. 204 Printing rear of the paper ....................................... 153 Problems with optional products ............................ 468 product specifications ............................................ 461 protocol ........................................... 294, 379, 384 PS Demo Page ...................................................... 342 PS files ................................................................... 293 PS Font List ........................................................... 343

T
TCP/IP ................................................................... 425 test print .................................................................. 32 Time you want to transmit ..................................... 314 Timeout ................................................................. 221 Timeout time .............................................. 225, 229 To delete a port ..................................................... 223 Toner save ............................................................ 190 top/bottom reversed .............................................. 284 Transmission retry ................................................. 221 transmitted as a fax ............................................... 309 tray ...................................... 144, 146, 248, 251 tray which to output ............................................... 251 trouble ................................................................... 458 TrueType font ............................................. 196, 484

U
UNIX ........................................................... 380, 425 Unix print service ........................................ 391, 396 upper limit on the print count ................................. 296 Usage of this Manual ............................................... xx User ID ............................................ 211, 297, 299

R
rasterizing .................................................................. 8 rear ......................................................................... 258 Reconnect .............................................................. 222 reduced .................................................................. 246 Registering recipient information ........................... 322 re-sends ................................................................. 225 Resolution .................................................. 192, 314 reverse ................................................................... 250 right binding ........................................................... 264

V
version ............................................. 220, 224, 228 virtual port ....................................... 222, 226, 230

W
Wait timeout .......................................................... 200 Watermark .................................................. 207, 286

S
Saving phonebooks ............................................... 331 Scaling ................................................................... 142 Scanner mode ............................................................ 7 security level ......................................... 34, 48, 65 Sender ID ............................................................... 314 Setting options ........................... 23, 30, 38, 45, 52, 61, 69 Setting the fax unit ................................................. 311 share the printer ....................................................... 59 Shared Printers ........................................................ 41 Smoothing .............................................................. 289 SNMP ..................................................................... 425 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ..................... iv Sort ........................................................................ 164 special mode .......................................................... 264 Spool .......................................................... 227, 231 Spool MS-DOS print jobs ....................................... 222 Spool settings ........................................................ 223 Staple ......................................................... 169, 271 Sub Address .......................................................... 314 substitute driver ........................................................ 44 super fine mode ..................................................... 314

510

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-12. Purpose-Oriented Index


C
Connection between the Computer and Printer Windows 95/98/Me ..........................................220 Windows NT 4.0...............................................224 Windows 2000/XP............................................228 Control Panel Operation Printer Settings ................................................336 Controller Settings Banner Page ....................................................345 Banner Page Tray............................................347 PDL Select .......................................................349

K
Key Operation Mode Setting with Key Operator Mode Auto Reset Timer ............................................ 372 Moving to Power Save .................................... 375 PRINT W/O Key Count ................................... 374

L
List Configuring Data ............................................. 344 PC-Fax Transmission Error Reports ............... 320 PCL Font List .................................................. 341 PS Font List .................................................... 343

D
Destination Driver Adobe PostScript ...............................................16 PCL ....................................................................16

N
Network Functions Internet Printing............................................... 409 Printing with AppleTalk.................................... 437 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer........................... 382 Printing with LPD/LPR..................................... 383 Printing with NetWare ..................................... 402

F
Fax Function Sending Faxes Fax Transmission.............................................313 PC-Fax Transmission Error Reports................320 Sending Faxes .................................................313 Using a phonebook ..........................................334 Font Downloading Fonts ..........................................490 Installing Adobe Type Manager (ATM) ............488 Installing Fonts.................................................485 PCL Font List ...................................................491 PostScript Font List..........................................496 PS Demo Page (Only When PostScript Option Installed) ... 342 Setting the Font................................................196

O
Options Hard Disk ........................................................ 467 Memory ........................................................... 466 Setting Options Windows 95/98/Me ..................................... 23, 30 Windows NT 4.0.......................................... 38, 45 Windows 2000 ............................................ 52, 61 Windows XP...................................................... 78

P
PostScript Setting (Windows) Addition of Euro currency symbol ................... 197 PostScript error information printing................ 199 PostScript header ........................................... 198 PostScript output format ................................. 197 PostScript timeout values................................ 200 PostScript Setting (Macintosh) File Save ......................................................... 293 Printer Functions Setting Printer Functions Setting Print Default ....................................... 351 Windows 95/98/Me ......................................... 114 Windows NT 4.0.............................................. 117 Windows 2000 ................................................ 121 Windows XP.................................................... 125 Macintosh........................................................ 233

I
Image Settings (Windows) Halftoning.........................................................187 Printing with Black and White Reversed ..........193 Printing with Left/Right Reversed.....................195 Setting the Resolution .....................................192 Smoothing........................................................188 Toner Save ......................................................190 Installing Adobe Type Manager (ATM) ...........................488 Driver Installation for Windows 95/98/Me ..........18 Driver Installation for Windows NT 4.0...............34 Driver Installation for Windows 2000 .................48 Driver Installation for Windows XP.....................65 Driver Installation for Macintosh.........................88 Fonts ................................................................484 Updating the Printer Driver ..............................100

511

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix

21-12. Purpose-Oriented Index


Printing Checking Printing Windows 95/98/Me ............................................32 Windows NT 4.0.................................................46 Windows 2000 ...................................................62 Windows XP.......................................................80 Macintosh...........................................................99 Managing Print Count Printer EKC/ECM .............................................297 Printing Multiple Pages (Macintosh) Attaching a Front Cover/Back Cover (Front Cover/Back Cover)......................281 Folding Paper in Two to Make Booklets (Special Mode).......................................264 Outputting Sorted into Separate Sets of Copies (Offset)...................................................269 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (Document Pages/Print Pages/Layout Direction) ...............................................260 Printing on Both the Front and Rear of the Paper (Duplex Printing) ....................................258 Printing One Copy at a Time of All Pages (Collate) .................................................267 Stapling (Staple) ..............................................271 Printing Multiple Pages (Windows) Attaching a Front Cover/Back Cover (Front Cover/Back Cover)......................177 Folding Paper in Two to Make Booklets (Combination) ........................................158 Outputting Sorted into Separate Sets of Copies (Offset)...................................................166 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (Pages per sheet/Layout) ......................155 Printing on Both the Front and Rear of the Paper (Duplex) .................................................153 Printing One Copy at a Time of All Pages (Collate/Sort)..........................................164 Stapling (Staple) ..............................................169 Setting Basic Print Function (Windows) Printing Enlarged/Reduced (Scaling) ...............142 Selecting the Input Tray (Paper Source)..........144 Selecting the Output Tray (Output Tray)..........146 Selecting the Type of Paper (Media Type/Paper Type) ......................140 Setting the Margin (Margins)............................148 Setting the Number of Copies to Print (Copies). ................................................134 Setting the Print Direction (Orientation) ...........136 Setting the Print Paper Size (Paper Size) ........138 Setting Basic Print Function (Macintosh) Printing Enlarged/Reduced (Magnification Ratio)..............................246 Selecting the Input Tray (Paper Source)..........248 Selecting the Output Tray (Output Tray)..........251 Selecting the Print Order (Reverse Print Order) ............................250 Selecting the Type of Paper (Media Type) ......244 Setting the Margin (Margins)........................... 253 Setting the Number of Copies to Print (Copies) ................................................ 236 Setting the Print Direction (Direction).............. 238 Setting the Print Paper Size (Paper) ............... 240 Special Printing (Windows) Printing Overlaying Another Document (Overlay) ............................................... 204 Printing with a Password (Password Print) ..... 211 Printing Watermarks (Watermark)................... 207 Special Printing (Macintosh) Conserving Toner ........................................... 291 Printing Watermarks........................................ 286 Printing with Black and White Reversed ......... 285 Printing with Top/Bottom or Left/Right Reversed..284 Smoothing Characters and Curved Lines ....... 289

S
Specifications PC-Fax Functions ................................... 461, 463 PostScript PS-344 Option Product.................. 465 PostScript PS-346 Option Product.................. 465 Printer Functions ..................................... 461, 463

512

VI Appendix Chapter 21 Appendix